Konica Minolta bizhub C250 Service Manual
  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. Konica Minolta Manuals
  4. All in One Printer
  5. BIZHUB C250
  6. Service manual

Konica Minolta bizhub C250 Service Manual

Hide thumbs Also See for bizhub C250:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
940
941
942
943
944
945
946
947
948
949
950
951
952
953
954
955
956
957
958
959
960
961
962
963
964
965
966
967
968
969
970
971
972
973
974
975
976
977
978
979
980
981
982
983
984
985
986
987
988
989
990
Table of Contents

Advertisement

Quick Links

Download this manual See also: Function Manual, Operation
SERVICE MANUAL
This Service Manual is designed for machine
This Service Manual is designed for machine
with Firmware Card Ver. G4 and onward.
with Firmware Card Ver. G4 and onward.
FIELD SERVICE
2006.08
2006.08
Ver. 3.0
Ver. 3.0

Advertisement

Table of Contents
loading
Need help?

Need help?

Do you have a question about the bizhub C250 and is the answer not in the manual?

Questions and answers

Related Manuals for Konica Minolta bizhub C250

Summary of Contents for Konica Minolta bizhub C250

  • Page 1 SERVICE MANUAL FIELD SERVICE This Service Manual is designed for machine This Service Manual is designed for machine with Firmware Card Ver. G4 and onward. with Firmware Card Ver. G4 and onward. 2006.08 2006.08 Ver. 3.0 Ver. 3.0...

  • Page 2: Table Of Contents

    WARNING INDICATIONS ON THE MACHINE ............S-18 MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT ........................S-20 Composition of the service manual ................. C-1 Notation of the service manual ..................C-2 bizhub C250/C252 Main Unit General ........................... 1 Maintenance ........................9 Adjustment/Setting...................... 169 Troubleshooting......................397 Appendix ........................
  • Page 3 Adjustment/Setting ....................... 17 Troubleshooting ......................25 AD-503 General ........................... 1 Maintenance ........................3 Adjustment/Setting ......................7 Troubleshooting ......................11 FS-501 General ........................... 1 Maintenance ........................5 Adjustment/Setting ......................9 Troubleshooting ......................19 FS-514/PK-510/OT-601 General ........................... 1 Maintenance ........................7 Adjustment/Setting ....................... 45 Troubleshooting ......................

  • Page 4: Safety And Important Warning Items

    IMPORTANT NOTICE Because of possible hazards to an inexperienced person servicing this product as well as the risk of damage to the product, KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. (hereafter called the KMBT) strongly recommends that all servicing be performed only by KMBT-trained service technicians.

  • Page 5: Safety Warnings

    [1] MODIFICATIONS NOT AUTHORIZED BY KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. KONICA MINOLTA brand products are renowned for their high reliability. This reliability is achieved through high-quality design and a solid service network. Product design is a highly complicated and delicate process where numerous mechanical, physical, and electrical aspects have to be taken into consideration, with the aim of arriving at proper tolerances and safety factors.
  • Page 6 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS [2] POWER PLUG SELECTION In some countries or areas, the power plug provided with the product may not fit wall outlet used in the area. In that case, it is obligation of customer engineer (hereafter called the CE) to attach appropriate power plug or power cord set in order to connect the product to the supply.

  • Page 7: Checkpoints When Performing On-Site Service

    SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS [3] CHECKPOINTS WHEN PERFORMING ON-SITE SERVICE KONICA MINOLTA brand products are extensively tested before shipping, to ensure that all applicable safety standards are met, in order to protect the customer and customer engi- neer (hereafter called the CE) from the risk of injury. However, in daily use, any electrical equipment may be subject to parts wear and eventual failure.
  • Page 8 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS Power Plug and Cord WARNING • When using the power cord set (inlet type) that came with this product, make sure the connector is securely inserted in the inlet of the product. When securing measure is provided, secure the cord with the fixture properly.
  • Page 9 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS Wiring WARNING • Never use multi-plug adapters to plug multiple power cords in the same outlet. If used, the risk of fire exists. • When an extension cord is required, use a specified one. Current that can flow in the extension cord is limited, so using a too long extension cord may result in fire.
  • Page 10 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS Ventilation CAUTION • The product generates ozone gas during operation, but it will not be harmful to the human body. If a bad smell of ozone is present in the following cases, ventilate the room. a.
  • Page 11 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS Work Performed with the Product Powered On WARNING • Take every care when making adjustments or performing an operation check with the product powered. If you make adjustments or perform an operation check with the external cover detached, you may touch live or high-voltage parts or you may be caught in moving gears or the timing belt, leading to a risk of injury.
  • Page 12 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS Safety Checkpoints WARNING • Check electrode units such as a charging corona unit for deterioration and sign of leakage. Current can leak, leading to a risk of trouble or fire. • Before disassembling or adjusting the write unit (P/H unit) incorporating a laser, make sure that the power cord has been disconnected.
  • Page 13 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS Safety Checkpoints WARNING • Make sure that all screws, components, wiring, connec- tors, etc. that were removed for safety check and mainte- nance have been reinstalled in the original location. (Pay special attention to forgotten connectors, pinched cables, forgotten screws, etc.) A risk of product trouble, electric shock, and fire exists.
  • Page 14 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS Handling of Service Materials CAUTION • Use only a small amount of cleaner at a time and take care not to spill any liquid. If this happens, immediately wipe it off. A risk of fire exists. •...
  • Page 15 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS [4] Used Batteries Precautions ALL Areas CAUTION Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer’s instructions. Germany VORSICHT! Explosionsgefahr bei unsachgemäßem Austausch der Batterie.
  • Page 16 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS [5] FUSE CAUTION Double pole / neutral fusing ATTENTION Double pôle / fusible sur le neutre. [6] Laser Safety • This is a digital machine certified as a Class 1 laser product. There is no possibility of danger from a laser, provided the machine is serviced according to the instruction in this manual.
  • Page 17 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS U.S.A., Canada (CDRH Regulation) • This machine is certified as a Class 1 Laser product under Radiation Performance Stan- dard according to the Food, Drug and Cosmetic Act of 1990. Compliance is mandatory for Laser products marketed in the United States and is reported to the Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S.
  • Page 18 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS Finland, Sweden LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT VAROITUS! • Laitteen käyttäminen muulla kuin tässä käyttöohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saat- taa altistaa käyttäjän turvallisuusluokan 1 ylittävälle näkymättömälle laser- säteilylle. puolijohdelaser Laserdiodin suurin teho 10 mW aallonpituus 775-800 nm VARNING!
  • Page 19 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS Laser Safety Label • A laser safety label is attached to the inside of the machine as shown below. * Only for the U.S.A. 4038P0E505DA Laser Caution Label • A laser caution label is attached to the outside of the machine as shown below. 4038P0C503DA S-16...
  • Page 20 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING THE LASER EQUIPMENT • When laser protective goggles are to be used, select ones with a lens conforming to the above specifications. • When a disassembly job needs to be performed in the laser beam path, such as when working around the printerhead and PC Drum, be sure first to turn the printer OFF.

  • Page 21: Warning Indications On The Machine

    SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS WARNING INDICATIONS ON THE MACHINE Caution labels shown are attached in some areas on/in the machine. When accessing these areas for maintenance, repair, or adjustment, special care should be taken to avoid burns and electric shock. High voltage •...
  • Page 22 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS WARNING WARNING • Do not position the used Waste • Do not burn used Toner Cartridges. Toner Box so that it is standing Toner expelled from the fire is dan- on end or tilted, otherwise toner gerous.

  • Page 23: Measures To Take In Case Of An Accident

    MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT 1. If an accident has occurred, the distributor who has been notified first must immediately take emergency measures to provide relief to affected persons and to prevent further damage.

  • Page 24: Composition Of The Service Manual

    Composition of the service manual This service manual consists of Theory of Operation section and Field Service section to explain the main machine and its corresponding options. Theory of Operation section gives, as information for the CE to get a full understanding of the product, a rough outline of the object and role of each function, the relationship between the electrical system and the mechanical system, and the timing of operation of each part.

  • Page 25: Notation Of The Service Manual

    Notation of the service manual A. Product name In this manual, each of the products is described as follows: (1) PWB-MFP: MFP Control Board (2) bizhub C250/C252: Main Unit (3) Microsoft Windows 95: Windows 95 Microsoft Windows 98: Windows 98...
  • Page 26 SERVICE MANUAL FIELD SERVICE Main Unit 2006.08 Ver. 3.0...
  • Page 27 Revision history After publication of this service manual, the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improvement of their performance. Therefore, the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine. When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual, a revised version will be issued with a revision mark added as required.
  • Page 28 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 CONTENTS bizhub C250/C252 Main Unit General System configuration....................1 Product specifications ..................... 4 Type ........................4 Functions ......................5 Types of Paper ...................... 6 Maintenance ......................6 Machine Specifications ..................7 Operating Environment..................7 Print Functions......................
  • Page 29 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 3.5.9 Replacing the Waste Toner Box..............28 3.5.10 Cleaning of the Area around the Waste Toner Collecting Port ....29 3.5.11 Replacing the Ozone Filter ................. 29 3.5.12 Replacing the Deodorant Filter ..............29 3.5.13 Replacing the Dust Filter/Vertical Conveyance...........
  • Page 30 Cleaning parts list ..................78 Disassembly/Assembly procedure..............79 6.3.1 IR Upper Right Cover/IR Right Cover/IR Upper Rear Cover....... 79 6.3.2 Left Cover (bizhub C250) /Upper Front Cover/IR Left Cover/IR Upper Front Cover......................80 6.3.3 Original Glass/IR Front Cover ..............81 6.3.4 Exit Tray/Upper Rear Cover/Lower Rear Cover/Rear Left Cover ....
  • Page 31 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 6.3.21 MFP Control Board (PWB-MFP)............... 102 6.3.22 DIMM0 (Work0), DIMM1 (Work1) ............. 104 6.3.23 Hard Disk Drive (HDD) ................104 6.3.24 High Voltage Unit (HV1)................106 6.3.25 Tray 1 Paper Size Board (PWB-I) ............. 107 6.3.26 Tray 2 Control Board (PWB-Z-PC)............
  • Page 32 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 6.4.9 Tray 2 Transport Roller ................158 6.4.10 Scanner Rail ..................... 159 6.4.11 Mirrors (1st/2nd/3rd) ................. 160 6.4.12 Lens ......................160 6.4.13 Original Glass ................... 161 6.4.14 CCD Sensor....................161 Mount the original size detecting sensor/2 (PC204) ......... 163 Option counter ....................
  • Page 33 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 8.6.6 Copier Setting ................... 263 8.6.7 Printer Setting ................... 264 8.6.8 Fax Setting....................265 8.6.9 System Connection................... 278 8.6.10 Security Setting..................279 Banner Printing....................289 Adjustment item list..................... 290 Service Mode ...................... 292 10.1 Service Mode function setting procedure ............292 10.2 Service Mode function tree................
  • Page 34 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 10.7.4 Setup confirmation ..................324 10.7.5 Calling the Maintenance ................324 10.7.6 Calling the Center from the Administrator ..........324 10.7.7 Checking the transmission log ..............324 10.7.8 Detail on settings ..................325 10.7.9 List of the CS Remote Care error code.............
  • Page 35 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 10.10.9 Service Call History (Data) ............... 347 10.10.10 ADF Paper Pages ..................347 10.10.11 Paper Jam History ..................347 10.10.12 Fax Connection Error................347 10.11 List Output ......................348 10.11.1 Machine Management List............... 348 10.11.2 Adjustment List ..................
  • Page 36 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 10.17.2 HTTP Setting .................... 370 10.17.3 FTP Setting ....................371 10.17.4 Forwarding Access Setting ............... 372 10.17.5 Download ....................373 Enhanced Security ....................374 11.1 Enhanced Security Function Setting Procedure ..........374 11.1.1 Procedure ....................374 11.1.2 Exiting .......................
  • Page 37 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 Troubleshooting Jam Display......................397 15.1 Misfeed Display ....................397 15.1.1 bizhub C250....................397 15.1.2 bizhub C252....................399 15.1.3 Misfeed Display Resetting Procedure............400 15.2 Sensor layout....................401 15.3 Solution ......................403 15.3.1 Initial Check Items ..................403 15.3.2...
  • Page 38 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 16.3 Trouble code ..................... 420 16.3.1 Trouble code list ..................420 16.4 How to reset...................... 442 16.5 Solution......................443 16.5.1 C0204: Tray 2 Elevator failure ..............443 16.5.2 C0211: Manual Tray Rise Descent Error........... 443 16.5.3 C0301: Suction Fan Motor’s failure to turn..........
  • Page 39 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 16.5.35 C3751: Abnormal High Temp. (Heater) ............ 451 16.5.36 C3752: Abnormal High Temp. (Press) ............451 16.5.37 C3851: Abnormal Low Temp. (Heater) ............. 451 16.5.38 C3852: Abnormal Low Temp. (Press) ............451 16.5.39 C3461: Fusing Unit New Article Release..........452 16.5.40 C3A01: Paper Stuck to Fuser Heater Roller ..........
  • Page 40 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 16.5.72 C6751: CCD clamp/gain adjustment failure ..........459 16.5.73 C9401: Exposure Lamp’s failure to turn ON ..........459 16.5.74 C9402: Exposure Lamp turning ON at abnormal timing ......459 16.5.75 CA051: Standard Controller configuration failure........460 16.5.76 CA052:Controller hardware error ..............
  • Page 41 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 16.5.109 CD251: No JPEG board mounting at JPEG board mount setting .... 465 16.5.110 CD3##: NVRAM Data error ..............466 16.5.111 CE001: Abnormal message queue............467 16.5.112 CE003: Task error..................467 16.5.113 CE004: Event error ................... 467 16.5.114 CE005: Memory access error ..............
  • Page 42 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 18.3.6 Scanner System: incorrect color image registration, sync shift (lines in main scan direction)................... 482 18.3.7 Scanner System: moire................483 18.3.8 Scanner System: skewed image............... 484 18.3.9 Scanner System: distorted image ............. 485 18.3.10 Scanner System: low image density, rough image ........486 18.3.11 Scanner System: defective ACS ...............
  • Page 43 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 18.3.38 Printer 4-Color: uneven image..............516 Appendix Parts layout drawing.................... 517 19.1 Main unit......................517 19.1.1 IR section....................517 19.1.2 Engine section ..................518 19.1.3 Tray 1 ......................522 19.1.4 Tray 2/Multiple bypass tray................ 523 19.2 DF-601 (Option) ....................

  • Page 44: General

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 1. System configuration General System configuration 1/2 System Front View (bizhub C250) [13] [12] [11] [10] 4038T1E101AA Machine Paper Feed Cabinet PC-403 Reverse Automatic Document Feeder Desk DK-502 DF-601 Original cover OC-501 [10] Finisher FS-501...
  • Page 45 1. System configuration Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 1/2 System Front View (bizhub C252) [18] [17] [16] [15] [14] [11] [13] [12] [10] 4038F1E507DA Machine [10] Finisher FS-501 Reverse Automatic Document Feeder DF-601 [11] Job Separator JS-601 Original cover OC-501 [12] Finisher FS-603 Working Table WT-501...
  • Page 46 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 1. System configuration 2/2 System Rear View [11] [10] PC-103 DK-502 PC-203 PC-403 4038T1E102AC Machine Scan Accelerator Kit SA-501 Vender Kit VK-501 Security Kit SC-503 * Only for Europe, North America, and Latin America (only 120V area) Mount Kit MK-706 Local Interface Kit EK-702 Dehumidifier Heater HT-501...

  • Page 47: Product Specifications

    2. Product specifications Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 Product specifications Type Type Desktop/Console *1 scanner/printer Copying System Electrostatic dry-powdered image transfer to plain paper Printing Process Tandem-type indirect electrostatic recording system PC Drum Type OPC (organic photo conductor) Scanning Density Equivalent to 600 dpi Exposure Lamp White rare-gas fluorescent lamp 30 W...

  • Page 48: Functions

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 2. Product specifications Functions Types of Original Sheets, books, and three-dimensional objects A3 or 11 × 17 (Ledger) Max. Original Size Max. Original Weight Max. 2 kg Multiple Copies 1 to 999 110 sec. or less Warm-up Time (at ambient temperature of 23°...

  • Page 49: Types Of Paper

    2. Product specifications Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 Types of Paper Paper Source Type Tray1 Tray2 Multiple Bypass Plain paper ❍ ❍ ❍ (60 to 90 g/m Translucent paper – – – OHP transparencies (crosswise – feeding only) Thick paper 1 –...

  • Page 50: Machine Specifications

    Max Power Consumption Less than 1,500 W (120 V, 12 A / 220 - 240 V, 8 A) 653 *2 (W) × 755 (D) × 771 *3 (H) mm bizhub C250 25.7 *2 (W) × 29.8 (D) × 30.4 (H) inch Dimensions 650 *2 (W) ×...

  • Page 51: Print Functions

    2000, Windows XP, or Windows NT 4.0 (SP6a) Mac OS 9.2 or later or Mac OS X 10.2 or 10.3 Scan Functions Driver KONICA MINOLTA Scanner Driver Compatible Operating Windows 98/98SE/Me, Windows NT 4.0 (SP6 or later), Windows 2000, Systems...

  • Page 52: Maintenance

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 3. Periodical check Maintenance Periodical check Service schedule Guarantee period (5-year or 600,000 prints) × 10,000-print Per cycle Number × print num- of times Upon each ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●...

  • Page 53: Maintenance Items

    3. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 Maintenance items 3.2.1 Parts to be replaced by users (CRU) Class Parts to be replaced Cycle Clean Replace Descriptions ● Imaging Unit C/M/Y 45 K ● Imaging Unit K 70 K ●...

  • Page 54: Periodical Parts Replacement 1 (Per 120,000-Print)

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 3. Periodical check 3.2.3 Periodical parts replacement 1 (per 120,000-print) Lubrica- Descrip- Class Parts to be replaced Quantity Check Clean Replace tion tions Paper feed and image ● conditions Overall ● ● Appearance 2nd Image Transfer ●...

  • Page 55: Periodical Parts Replacement 3 (Per 300,000-Print)

    3. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 3.2.5 Periodical parts replacement 3 (per 300,000-print) Lubrica- Descrip- Class Parts to be replaced Quantity Check Clean Replace tion tions Paper feed and image ● conditions Overall ● ● Appearance ● Pick-up Roller ●...

  • Page 56: Maintenance Parts

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 3. Periodical check Maintenance parts • To ensure that the machine produces good copies and to extend its service life, it is rec- ommended that the maintenance jobs described in this schedule be carried out as instructed.

  • Page 57: Cleaning Parts

    3. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 B. Option Actual Ref.Page Descrip- No. Classification Parts name durable Parts No. in this ntity tions cycle *1 manual Pick-up Roller 200 K 4582 3022 ## Replace those three Feed Roller 200 K 4582 3014 ## DF-601...

  • Page 58: Concept Of Parts Life

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 3. Periodical check Concept of parts life Life value Max. number of Description (Specification printed pages value) A waste toner full condition is detected when about Waste Toner 2,500 printed pages have been produced after a –...
  • Page 59 3. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 A. Conditions for Life Specifications Values • The life specification values represent the number of copies made or figures equivalent to it when given conditions (see the Table given below) are met. They can be more or less depending on the machine operating conditions of each individual user.

  • Page 60: Maintenance Procedure (Periodical Check Parts)

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 3. Periodical check Maintenance procedure (Periodical check parts) NOTE • The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure of Maintenance represents the isopropyl alcohol. 3.5.1 Replacing the Tray 1 Feed Roller 1. Slide out the Tray 1. 2.

  • Page 61: Replacing The Bypass Tray Feed Roller

    3. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 3. Take off the rubber stopper [3], shaft [4], spring [5], and guide plate [6] to remove the Paper Separation Roller fixing bracket Assy [7]. 4038F2C003DB 4. Snap off the E-ring [8] and the Tray 1 Paper Separation Roller Assy [9].
  • Page 62 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 3. Periodical check 3. Remove the Gear [3]. 4038F2C005DA 4. Snap off the E-ring [4] and remove the Bearing [5]. 4038F2C006DB 5. Snap off two C-ring [6], and remove the Bearing [7]. 4038F2C007DB...

  • Page 63: Replacing The Bypass Tray Separation Roller Assy

    3. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 6. Remove the Bypass Tray Feed Roller [8]. 7. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal. 8. Select [Service Mode] → [Counter] → [Life] and clear the count of [Manual Tray]. NOTE •...

  • Page 64: Replacing The Tray 2 Separation Roller

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 3. Periodical check 4. Snap off the C-clip [5], and remove the spring [6] and the guide plate [7]. Remove the Bypass Paper Separa- tion Roller Assy [8]. 5. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

  • Page 65: Replacing The Tray 2 Feed Roller

    3. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 5. Remove two Screws [5] and the Tray 2 Separation Roller installation plate Assy [6]. 4038F2C013DA 6. Remove two C-rings [7] and the Shaft [8], and remove the Separation Roller fixing plate Assy [9]. NOTE •...
  • Page 66 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 3. Periodical check 4. Remove the Screws [2] and remove the Reinforcement plate [3]. 4038F2C015DA 5. Remove four Screws [4] and remove the Tray 2 Feed Roller Assy [5]. 4038F2C016DA 6. Remove two Screws [6] and the Installation flame [7] of the Tray 2 Separation Roller installation plate Assy.
  • Page 67 3. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 7. Remove two Screws [8] and Tray 2 Feed Roller cover [9]. 4037F2C006DB 8. Remove the C-ring [10] and Bushing [11]. [11] [10] 4038F2C510DA 9. Remove the C-ring [13] and Gear [14] while sliding out the Shaft Assy [12] in the direction indicated in left [12]...

  • Page 68: Replacing The Tray 2 Pick-Up Roller

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 3. Periodical check 10. Remove the C-ring [15] and Bushing [16], and remove the Shaft Assy [17]. [16] [15] [17] 4038F2C512DA 11. Remove two E-rings [18] and Bush- ing [19], and remove the Tray 2 Pick- [20] up Roller fixing plate Assy [20].
  • Page 69 3. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 4. Remove the Screws [2] and remove the Reinforcement plate [3]. 4038F2C015DA 5. Remove four Screws [4] and remove the Tray 2 Feed Roller Assy [5]. 4038F2C016DA 6. Remove two Screws [6], and remove the Tray 2 Separation Roller installa- tion plate Assy [7] together with Frame.

  • Page 70: Cleaning Of The Registration Roller

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 3. Periodical check 7. Remove two Screws [8] and Tray 2 Feed Roller cover [9]. 4037F2C006DB 8. Remove two C-rings [10] and two [10] Bushings [11], and remove the Tray [12] 2 Pick-up Roller Assy [12]. [11] [11] 4038F2C514DA...

  • Page 71: Replacing The Waste Toner Box

    3. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 3.5.9 Replacing the Waste Toner Box 1. Open the Front Door. 2. Press the Waste Toner Box release lever [1]. 4038F2C541DA 3. Remove the Waste Toner Box [2]. NOTE • Raise the Waste Toner Box gently before removing it.

  • Page 72: Cleaning Of The Area Around The Waste Toner Collecting Port

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 3. Periodical check 3.5.10 Cleaning of the Area around the Waste Toner Collecting Port 1. Remove the Waste Toner Box. See P.28 2. Wipe the areas around the Waste Toner Collecting Port [1] clean of spilled toner and dirt using a soft cloth dampened with water or alco- hol.

  • Page 73: Replacing The Dust Filter/Vertical Conveyance

    3. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 3.5.13 Replacing the Dust Filter/Vertical Conveyance 1. If the optional Automatic Duplex Unit AD-503 is mounted, remove it. See AD-503 Service Manual. 2. Remove the Dust Filter/Vertical Con- veyance [1]. NOTE •...

  • Page 74: Replacing The Unit

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 3. Periodical check Replacing the unit 3.6.1 Replacing the 2nd Image Transfer Roller Unit A. Removal Procedure 1. Open the Front Door and turn OFF the Main Power Switch. 2. Open the Right Door. 3.
  • Page 75 3. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 4. Open the Right Door. 5. Remove two Screws [1] and release the Lock of the Image Transfer Belt Unit [2]. 4038F2C023DA 6. Hold the both sides and lift it to take out the Image Transfer Belt Unit [3] a little.

  • Page 76: Cleaning Of The Image Transfer Entrance Guide

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 3. Periodical check B. Reinstallation Procedure 1. Insert the Transfer Belt Unit [1]. NOTE • Insert the Transfer Belt Unit with care not to allow its docking gear to be damaged by hitting it against the rail or associated part.

  • Page 77: Cleaning Of The Idc/Registration Sensor 1, 2

    3. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 3.6.4 Cleaning of the IDC/Registration Sensor 1, 2 1. Remove the Image Transfer Belt. See P.31 2. Wipe the surface of the IDC/Regis- tration Sensor 1, 2 [1] clean of spilled toner and dirt using a cotton bud.
  • Page 78 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 3. Periodical check B. Reinstallation Procedure 1. Take out the new Toner Cartridge [1] from the unitary packing box and shake it well up and down 5 to 10 times. 4038F2C539DA 2. Insert the Toner Cartridge [2] by fit- ting it to the groove on the main unit.

  • Page 79: Cleaning Of The Comb Electrode

    3. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 3.6.6 Cleaning of the Comb Electrode 1. Open the Front Door. 2. Clean the Comb Electrode by mov- ing the Comb Electrode Cleaning Lever [1] In and Out several times. (Only for the Imaging Unit/K) NOTE •...
  • Page 80 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 3. Periodical check B. Reinstallation Procedure 1. Remove the Imaging Unit from its plastic bag. 2. Peel off the Tape [1] so that the Mounting Bracket [2] can be removed. Then, remove the Mounting Bracket [2].
  • Page 81 3. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 5. Keeping the Imaging Unit [5] in a level position, insert the Imaging Unit [5] into the mounting position all the way until it is stopped. NOTE • Install them by fitting the blue label position of Imaging Unit and one of the machine.

  • Page 82: Replacing The Fusing Unit

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 3. Periodical check 3.6.8 Replacing the Fusing Unit CAUTION • Before replacing the Fusing Unit, ensure that it has had time to cool down. 1. Open the Front Door. 2. Turn OFF the Main Power Switch and unplug the power cord from the power outlet, then wait for about 20 minutes.
  • Page 83 3. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 7. Disconnect two Connectors [6]. 4038F2C031DA 8. Open the Right Cover. 9. Open the Fusing Unit Cover. 10. Remove two Screws [7], and remove the Fusing unit [8]. 4038F2C032DA...

  • Page 84: Service Tool

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 4. Service tool Service tool CE Tool list Tool name Shape Personnel Parts No. Remarks Scanner Drive Cable 4581 7901 ## Holding Jig 4036fs2001c0 PH Window Cleaning Jig 4038 2083 ## 4038F2C557DA PH Window Cleaning Jig 4038 2084 ## 4038F2C558DA ...

  • Page 85: Copy Materials

    4. Service tool Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 Copy materials 4.2.1 Imaging Unit Single Parts (IU) Also replace the Dust filter packed in the Imaging Unit Black at the same time. Parts name Replacing period IU Black 70,000 copies IU Yellow 45,000 copies IU Magenta...

  • Page 86: Firmware Upgrade

    5. Turn OFF the Main Power Switch and turn it ON again more than 10 seconds after. NOTE • In the case the optional FAX kit (FK-502) is installed, following phenomena occurs when MFP controller firmware is updated with following conditions. (bizhub C250 only) (Occurrence condition) •...

  • Page 87: Preparations For Firmware Rewriting By Cygwin

    5. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 Preparations for firmware rewriting by Cygwin 5.2.1 Outline • Write the firmware into the compact flash using Cygwin. • Cygwin consists of two types: Full install version and light version that is comprised only of necessary files.
  • Page 88 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 5. Firmware upgrade 4. Specify the folder for installation. Check to make sure that “Root Directory” is in default setting, [C:\cygwin]. NOTE • Make sure to check that “Root Directory” is in default setting, [C:\cygwin]. •...
  • Page 89 5. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 8. Click [Next (N)]. 4037F2E549DA 9. Click [Complete] to start installing. 4037F2E550DA B. For the light version 1. Decompress the downloaded compressed file “cygwin_rhein_phase2.zip” directly to the C drive (Windows system drive). 2.

  • Page 90: Settings Of The Windows Environmental Variable

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 5. Firmware upgrade 5.2.4 Settings of the Windows Environmental Variable 1. After installing, open the Property of “My Computer”, and click the “Environmental Vari- able” of “Advanced” tab. 2. Click the “New” in System Variable Setting. 4036fs2620e0 3.

  • Page 91: Writing Into The Compact Flash

    5. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 5.2.5 Writing into the Compact flash 1. Put the data of Firmware in the optional directory. (C:\bizhub in the below figure) 4038F2E562DB NOTE • The file name of Firmware data consists of the “Release Date_Version_CHECKSUM-****.exe.”...
  • Page 92 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 5. Firmware upgrade 3. Mount the Compact flash on the PC, and check the Drive name, which was recognized in the Windows. (F-drive in the following figure) 4036fs2623e0 4. Click [Start] → [Program] → [Accessories] → [Command Prompt] to open the Com- mand Prompt.
  • Page 93 5. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 7. Once the “mkcf.bat” is executed, data writing into the Compact flash is started. 8. Upon completion of writing, CHECKSUM is executed. If CHECKSUM value is precisely matched, “VERIFY OK” appears. 4038F2E565DB 9.

  • Page 94: Preparations For Firmware Rewriting By Firmware Imaging Toolkit 2006

    • This software is designed as the tool to write firmware data of MFP/printer released by KMBT into the compact flash card. 5.3.1 Correspond model • Correspond models of the software is as follows. • bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C352/C450 Color machine • bizhub C250P/C352P/C450P • bizhub 200/250/350 B/W machine •...

  • Page 95: Installation Of Software

    5. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 5.3.4 Installation of software • Follow the procedures shown below to install the software. NOTE • Install the software to the PC with the administration authentication. • When any anti-virus program is activated, quite the program before the installa- tion.
  • Page 96 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 5. Firmware upgrade 3. After checking the contents of license agreement, select [I accept the terms in the license agreement] and click [Next >]. 9J06F2E701DA 4. Select the installed destination folder of Firmware Imaging Toolkit 2006, and click [Next>].

  • Page 97: Update Of Software

    5. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 5. Click [Install] to start installation. 6. Click [Finish] to complete the installation. 9J06F2E703DA 7. Shortcut file will be created inside Windows Start menu ([Program] → [KONICA MINOLTA] → [Firmware Imaging Toolkit 2006]). 9J06F2E708DA 5.3.5 Update of software...

  • Page 98: Screen

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 5. Firmware upgrade 5.3.6 Screen A. Main window • The main window will be displayed after activating the software. • Main window consists of 2 patterns: Basic mode, Advanced mode. When the advanced mode is selected 9J06F2E704DA About •...
  • Page 99 5. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 B. Settings dialog • It will be displayed by clicking [Settings] at main window. • Other settings will be enabled by selecting the check box of [Enabled Advanced Fea- tures]. 9J06F2E705DA Enable Advanced •...

  • Page 100: Details Of Each Function

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 5. Firmware upgrade 5.3.7 Details of each function A. Basic functions (1) Write Firmware to a card • To write FW data into the compact flash. The FW data of the models shown below can be written.
  • Page 101 5. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 B. Advanced functions (1) Create a Firmware Image from a card • Create the image file from the firmware data written into the compact flash. Create the image file by dumping directly the data in the card. This function allows us to save the various type of firmware data in the compact flash as the image file and hold as copy data.

  • Page 102: How To Write Firmware Data

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 5. Firmware upgrade 5.3.8 How to write firmware data A. In the case of C450/C450P/C351/C352/C352P/C300/C250/C250P series 1. Put the firmware data in the optional directory. (C:\bizhub in the below figure) 9J06F2E710DA NOTE • The file name of firmware data consists of the “Release Date_Version_CHECKSUM-****.exe.”...
  • Page 103 5. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 3. Mount the compact flash on the PC, and check the drive name, which was recognized in the Windows. (F-drive in the following figure) 9J06F2E712DA 4. Start Firmware Imaging Toolkit 2006. NOTE •...
  • Page 104 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 5. Firmware upgrade 6. Click [Browse]. 9J06F2E707DA 7. Select the file type [C450/ C351/C352/ C300/C350/C250 Indexed Firmware]. 9J06F2E713DA 8. Move to the folder decompressed at step 2, confirm that only "###_cf.tar.gz" (### is for model name) is displayed, and select.
  • Page 105 5. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 10. Select the drive that the compact flash is inserted, which is confirmed at step 3. NOTE • The drives other than the compact flash that is recognized as “Removable Disk” can be selected for the writing destination.
  • Page 106 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 5. Firmware upgrade 13. Click [Yes], and data writing starts. NOTE • Writing a card is a resource intensive operation for your computer - do not attempt to multitask (use the computer for anything else) during the writing procedure. 14.

  • Page 107: Firmware Rewriting By Compact Flash

    5. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 Firmware rewriting by compact flash • The F/W is updated using the compact flash. 5.4.1 Updating method NOTE • NEVER remove or insert the Compact Flash card with the machine power turned 1.
  • Page 108 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 5. Firmware upgrade F/W to be updated Appropriate board MFP CONTROLLER MFP Control Board (PWB-MFP) SCANNER Image Processing Board (PWB-C) PRINTER Mechanical Control Board (PWB-M) FAX BOARD CONTROLLER1 Fax Board (Main) *1 FAX BOARD CONTROLLER2 Fax Board (Sub) *2 *1: The Optional FAX kit is necessary for the above procedure.

  • Page 109: Action When Data Transfer Fails

    5. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 5.4.2 Action When Data Transfer Fails • If “NG” appears on the Control Panel, indicating that rewriting has been unsuccessful (in which case the Start key lights up red), take the following steps. 1.

  • Page 110: Updating The Firmware With The Internet Isw

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 5. Firmware upgrade Updating the Firmware with the Internet ISW 5.5.1 Out line • [Internet ISW] is the system which gives the instruction for updating the Firmware with the control panel of the Copier, so the Copier will automatically receive the Firmware from the Program Server over a network for updating.
  • Page 111 5. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 B. Protocol Setting • It performs the setting concerning the Protocol (ftp or http) for connecting to the Internet ISW. • When connecting to the Program Server using a proxy server, perform the setting for a Proxy Server.
  • Page 112 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 5. Firmware upgrade C. Forwarding Access Setting • To make the access setting for the Program Server which stores the Firmware data. 1. Select [Internet ISW] which is available from [Service Mode]. 2. Touch [Forwarding Access Setting]. 4037F2E622DA 3.

  • Page 113: Firmware Rewriting

    5. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 5.5.4 Firmware rewriting NOTE • When performing the Internet ISW, ask the administrator for permission before- hand. • Do not turn power OFF while downloading. A. Conducting rewriting on the control panel. 1.
  • Page 114 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 5. Firmware upgrade B. During Firmware Updating 1. The message to indicate the status will be displayed on the screen while connecting or transferring data. C. Completed or failed (1) Firmware updated normally 1. When the Firmware is normally updated, restart the Copier in auto or manual mode to display the outcome, and touch [OK] to return to the Main screen.
  • Page 115 5. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 (3) Failing to update the Firmware after downloading has started 1. Once Firmware updating has started, the ROM in the Copier will be deleted. When it failed right after updating has started, restart the Copier, and shift to the standby screen to retry downloading.

  • Page 116: Error Code List For The Internet Isw

    [Service Mode] → [Internet ISW] → [Transfer access setting] • If the above process does not solve the problem, inform the corresponding error code to the KONICA MINOLTA. • Check if the following setting is set to “Valid”. [Service Mode] → [Internet ISW] →...
  • Page 117 [Internet ISW setting] PSWC, etc. • If the above process does not solve the • There is no space for F/W data to be 0x10000104 problem, inform the corresponding downloaded. error code to the KONICA MINOLTA. 0x10000106 • Check sum error...
  • Page 118 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 5. Firmware upgrade Error code Description Countermeasure Control panel File access error • The file downloaded has an error. • The header of the file which has been read has an error. • Check to see if the downloaded F/W is 0x10000107 •...

  • Page 119: Other

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 Other Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items A. Screws to which blue paint or green paint is applied • Blue paint or green paint is applied to some screws to prevent them from coming loose. •...

  • Page 120: Disassembly/Assembly/Cleaning List (Other Parts)

    P.82 Upper Rear Cover P.82 Lower Rear Cover P.82 Rear Left Cover P.82 Multi Bypass Tray Left Cover (bizhub C250) P.83 Exterior parts Multi Bypass Tray Right Cover (bizhub C250) P.83 Multi Bypass Tray Upper Cover (bizhub C250) P.83 Multi Bypass Tray Left Cover (bizhub C252) P.83...

  • Page 121: Cleaning Parts List

    Part name Ref.Page Tray 2 Paper Size Board P.109 Board and etc. Inverter Board P.111 PH Interface Board P.111 Multi Bypass Unit (bizhub C250) P.113 Multi Bypass Unit (bizhub C252) P.114 PH Unit P.115 Unit Transport Drive Assy P.120 Hopper Drive Assy P.122...

  • Page 122: Disassembly/Assembly Procedure

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 6. Other Disassembly/Assembly procedure 6.3.1 IR Upper Right Cover/IR Right Cover/IR Upper Rear Cover 4037F2C033DA 1. Remove three Screws [1], and remove the IR Upper Right Cover [2]. 2. Open the Fusing Unit Cover. 3.

  • Page 123: Left Cover (Bizhub C250) /Upper Front Cover/Ir Left Cover/Ir Upper

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 6.3.2 Left Cover (bizhub C250) /Upper Front Cover/IR Left Cover/IR Upper Front Cover [10] 4037F2C034DA 1. Open the Front Door [1]. 2. Remove three Screws [2], and remove the Left Tray [3].

  • Page 124: Original Glass/Ir Front Cover

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 6. Other 6.3.3 Original Glass/IR Front Cover 4037F2C035DA 1. Remove the IR Upper Right Cover. See P.79 2. Remove each Screw [1], and remove the Original Glass fixing bracket (near side/ inmost side) [2]. 3.

  • Page 125: Exit Tray/Upper Rear Cover/Lower Rear Cover/Rear Left Cover

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 6.3.4 Exit Tray/Upper Rear Cover/Lower Rear Cover/Rear Left Cover [10] 4037F2C036DA 1. Remove the Left Cover. See P.80 2. Remove the Sub Tray [1]. 3. Remove three Screws [2], and remove the Exit Tray [3]. 4.

  • Page 126: Multi Bypass Tray Left Cover/Multi Bypass Tray Right Cover/Multi Bypass Tray Upper Cover

    6.3.5 Multi Bypass Tray Left Cover/Multi Bypass Tray Right Cover/Multi Bypass Tray Upper Cover A. bizhub C250 4037F2C037DA 1. Unhook the tab [1], and remove the Multi Bypass Tray Left Cover [2]. 2. Remove the Screws [3], and remove the Multi Bypass Tray Right Cover [4].

  • Page 127: Front Door

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 6.3.6 Front Door 1. Open the Front Door. 2. Remove the Screw [1] each to remove the Right and Left Stoppers [2]. 4038F2C038DB 3. Pull out the Right and Left Pins [3] to remove the Front Door [4].

  • Page 128: Left Cover (Bizhub C252)

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 6. Other 6.3.8 Left cover (bizhub C252) 1. If the optional finisher FS-514 is mounted, remove it. See FS-514 Service Manual. See P.18 NOTE • After removing the finisher FS-514, remove four screws [1] and mount- ing plate [2].

  • Page 129: Control Panel (Un201)

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 6.3.9 Control Panel (UN201) 1. Remove four caps [1] at both ends of Control Panel. 4038F2C040DB 2. Remove four Screws [2]. 4038F2C041DB...

  • Page 130: Tray 1

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 6. Other 3. Remove the Flat Cable [3]. 4. Remove the Control Panel [4]. 4038F2C042DA 6.3.10 Tray 1 1. Slide out the Tray 1 [1]. 4038F2C043DB 2. Loosen the screw [2], hold two tabs [3] and remove the spacer [4].

  • Page 131: Tray 2

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 3. Slide out the Tray 1 [6] while press- ing the Slide Locks [5] at both ends. 4037F2C044DB 6.3.11 Tray 2 1. Slide out the Tray 2 [1]. 4038F2C045DB...

  • Page 132: Tray 2 Rear Right Cover/Tray 2 Rear Left Cover

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 6. Other 2. Remove the Screw [2], and remove the Stopper [3]. 3. Slide out the Tray 2 while pressing the Slide Locks [4]. 4038F2C046DB 6.3.12 Tray 2 Rear Right Cover/Tray 2 Rear Left Cover 1.

  • Page 133: Tray 2 Right Rear Cover

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 2. Remove four Screws [3], and remove the Tray 2 Rear Right Cover [4]. 4038F2C048DA 3. Remove three Screws [5], and remove the Tray 2 Rear Left Cover [6]. 4038F2C049DA 6.3.13 Tray 2 Right Rear Cover 1.

  • Page 134: Front Cover

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 6. Other 6.3.14 Front Cover 1. Remove the Front Door. See P.84 2. Remove the Left Cover, Upper Front Cover and Exit Tray. See P.80, P.82 3. Remove the Toner Cartridges (C, M, Y, K). See P.34 4.
  • Page 135 6. Other Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 8. Disconnect two Connectors [4]. 4038F2C053DA 9. Remove four Screws [5]. 4038F2C054DA 10. Unhook six tabs [6], and remove the Front Cover [7]. 4038F2C055DA...

  • Page 136: Mechanical Control Board (Pwb-M)

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 6. Other 6.3.15 Mechanical Control Board (PWB-M) NOTE • If a Finishing Option is installed, remove if from the main unit before trying to remove the Mechanical Control Board. • When removing the Finishing Option, support the Horizontal Transport Unit with your hand to prevent if from dropping.
  • Page 137 6. Other Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 6. Remove six Screws [5], and remove the Mechanical Control Board [6]. 4038F2C059DA NOTE • When Mechanical Control Board (PWB-M) is replaced, relocate the Parameter Chip (IC6). Mount the Parameter Chip (IC6) of old Mechanical Control Board onto the new Mechanical Control Board.

  • Page 138: Dc Power Supply (Pu1)

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 6. Other 6.3.16 DC Power Supply (PU1) NOTE • If a Finishing Option is installed, remove if from the main unit before trying to remove the DC Power Supply. • When removing the Finishing Option, support the Horizontal Transport Unit with your hand to prevent if from dropping.
  • Page 139 6. Other Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 6. Disconnect the Connector [7], and remove the Harness [9] from the Wire saddles [8]. 4038F2C064DA 7. Remove two Screws [10], and remove the Power Supply Cooling Fan Motor/1 [11]. [11] [10] 4038F2C065DA 8.

  • Page 140: Scanner Motor Drive Board (Pwb-Ic)

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 6. Other 9. Remove four Screws [12], and [12] [13] remove the DC Power Supply [13]. [12] 4038F2C067DB 6.3.17 Scanner Motor Drive Board (PWB-IC) 1. Remove the IR Upper Rear Cover. See P.79 2. Disconnect three Connectors [1] and four Board Supports [2].
  • Page 141 6. Other Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 3. Remove four Screws [3] and Flat Cable [4], and remove the CCD Unit [5]. 4038F2C070DA B. Reinstallation Procedure 1. Align the CCD Unit with the center of the graduations as illustrated on the left and then tighten the four screws.

  • Page 142: Image Processing Board (Pwb-C)

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 6. Other 6.3.19 Image Processing Board (PWB-C) 1. Remove the Upper Rear Cover and IR Right Cover. See P.82, P.79 2. Remove the CCD Unit Cover. Refer to the step1 to 2 on P.161. 3.
  • Page 143 6. Other Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 6. Disconnect two Connectors [7]. 4037F2C037DA 7. Remove all the Connectors and the Flat Cables on the Image Processing Board [8]. 4038F2C072DB 8. Remove six Screws [9] and two Bolts [10], and remove the Image Process- ing Board [11].

  • Page 144: Slide Interface Board (Pwb-Sif)

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 6. Other 6.3.20 Slide Interface Board (PWB-SIF) 1. Remove the Lower Rear Cover. See P.82 2. Remove all the Connectors and the Flat Cable on the Slide Interface Board. 4038F2C074DA 3. Remove five Screws [1]. 4038F2C075DA 4.

  • Page 145: Mfp Control Board (Pwb-Mfp)

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 6.3.21 MFP Control Board (PWB-MFP) 1. Remove the Upper Rear Cover, Lower Rear Cover and Rear Right Cover. See P.82, P.84 2. Remove the Slide Interface Board. See P.101 3. Remove thirteen Screws, and remove the Shield cover [1].
  • Page 146 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 6. Other 6. Disconnect the Connector [4] and Flat Cable [5]. 4038F2C079DA 7. Remove four Bolts [6] and six Screws [7], and remove the Interface cover [8]. 4038F2C080DA 8. Remove thirteen Screws [9], and remove the MFP Control Board [10].

  • Page 147: Dimm0 (Work0), Dimm1 (Work1)

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 6.3.22 DIMM0 (Work0), DIMM1 (Work1) 1. Remove the Upper Rear Cover, Lower Rear Cover and Rear Right Cover. See P.82, P.84 2. Remove thirteen Screws, and remove the Shield cover [1]. 4038F2C507DA 3.
  • Page 148 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 6. Other 3. Disconnect the Connector [2]. 4038F2C083DA 4. Remove the four Screws [3], and remove the Hard Disk Drive Assy [4]. 4038F2C084DA 5. Remove four screws [5] and the Flat cable [6], and remove the Hard Disk Drive [7].

  • Page 149: High Voltage Unit (Hv1)

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 6.3.24 High Voltage Unit (HV1) 1. Remove the PWB Box. See P.138 2. Disconnect four Connectors [1]. 4038F2C085DA 3. Remove five Screws [2] and the tab [3], and remove the High Voltage Unit [4].

  • Page 150: Tray 1 Paper Size Board (Pwb-I)

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 6. Other 6.3.25 Tray 1 Paper Size Board (PWB-I) 1. Slide out the Tray 1. 2. Remove the PWB Box. See P.138 3. Remove two Screws [1] and Connec- tor [2], and remove the Tray 1 Paper Size Board Assy [3].
  • Page 151 6. Other Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 3. Remove the Screw [2], and remove the Metal blanking plate [3]. 4038F2C090DA 4. Remove the Harness [5] from the Wire saddle [4]. 4038F2C091DA 5. Remove all the Connectors on the Tray 2 Control Board. 4038F2C092DA...

  • Page 152: Tray 2 Paper Size Board (Pwb-I-Pc)

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 6. Other 6. Remove four Screws [6], and remove the Tray 2 Control Board [7]. 4038F2C093DA 6.3.27 Tray 2 Paper Size Board (PWB-I-PC) 1. Slide out the Tray 2. 2. Remove the Tray 2 Rear Right Cover and Tray 2 Rear Left Cover.
  • Page 153 6. Other Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 5. Remove the Harness [5] from the Edge cover [4]. 4038F2C094DB 6. Remove three Screws [6], and remove the Tray 2 Control Board Assy [7]. 4038F2C095DA 7. Remove two Claws [8] and the Con- nector [9], and remove the Tray 2 Paper Size Board Assy [10].

  • Page 154: Inverter Board (Pu201)

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 6. Other 8. Remove the Lever [11], and remove [11] the Tray 2 Paper Size Board [12]. [12] 4038F2C517DA 6.3.28 Inverter Board (PU201) 1. Remove the Scanner Assy. See P.129 2. Remove four Screws [1], Flat Cable [2] and Connector [3], and remove the Inverter Board [4].
  • Page 155 6. Other Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 4. Remove seven Screws [3], and remove the Right Door Switch Assy [4]. 4038F2C098DA 5. Remove the Screw [5] each, and remove the Imaging Unit contact Assy [6] of each color. 4038F2C099DA 6.

  • Page 156: Multi Bypass Unit

    [10], and remove the PH Interface Board [11]. [11] [10] 4038F2C102DB 6.3.30 Multi Bypass Unit A. bizhub C250 1. Remove the Multi Bypass Tray Right Cover and the Multi Bypass Tray Left Cover. See P.83 2. Disconnect five Connectors [1]. 4038F2C103DA...
  • Page 157 6. Other Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 3. Remove four Screws [2], and remove the Multi Bypass Unit [3]. 4038F2C104DA NOTE • When installing the Multi Bypass Unit, fit the position of dowel shown in the left illustration. 4038F2C105DA B.

  • Page 158: Ph Unit

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 6. Other 4. Remove four screws [1], and remove the multi bypass unit [2]. 9J06F2C056DA NOTE • When installing the multi bypass unit, fit the position of dowel shown in the left illustration. 9J06F2C057DA 6.3.31 PH Unit A.
  • Page 159 6. Other Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 4. Disconnect the Flat Cable [4] and the Connector [5] of the PH Unit (Black). 4038F2C107DA 5. Unhook the tab [6], and remove the Gear [7] of the PH Unit (Black). 4038F2C108DB 6.
  • Page 160 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 6. Other 7. Remove the PH Unit (Black). Move the front side of the PH Unit to left a little, and remove the boss [9] [10] from the locating hole [10]. Lift up the front side of the PH Unit a little.
  • Page 161 6. Other Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 B. Reinstall Procedure 1. Fit the back of the PH Unit [1] into the plate spring [2] of installation plate. 4037F2C113DB 2. Push the PH Unit [3] along the right side line of PH Unit installation plate all the way and fit it into the plate spring [4].
  • Page 162 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 6. Other 4. Reinstall the Stopper [7]. NOTE • When reinstalling the Stopper, use care so that both ends of the Stop- per will not open but stay parallel as shown on the left. Keep using the Stopper after once stretched out may cause uneven pitch or other image troubles.

  • Page 163: Transport Drive Assy

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 6.3.32 Transport Drive Assy 1. Remove the PWB Box. See P.138 2. Remove the High Voltage Unit. See P.106 3. Remove the Color Developing Motor. See P.142 4. Remove the Color PC Drum Motor. See P.142 5.
  • Page 164 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 6. Other 9. Remove five Screws [7] and the Connector [8], and remove the Rear Handle Assy [9]. 4038F2C121DA 10. Disconnect the Connector [10]. [12] 11. Remove the Harnesses [12] from [11] five Wire Saddles [11]. [12] [10] [11]...

  • Page 165: Hopper Drive Assy

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 6.3.33 Hopper Drive Assy 1. Remove the Transfer Drive Assy. See P.120 2. Disconnect seven Connectors [1]. 4038F2C124DB 3. Remove the Harness from four Wire Saddles [2]. 4038F2C125DA 4. Remove two Screws [3], and remove the Duct [4].

  • Page 166: Right Door Assy

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 6. Other 5. Remove four Screws [5] and two Claws [6], and remove the Hopper Drive Assy [7]. 4038F2C127DA 6.3.34 Right Door Assy 1. Remove the PWB Box. See P.138 2. Remove the High Voltage Unit. See P.106 3.
  • Page 167 6. Other Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 6. Remove the Screw [3] fixing the IR cable. 4038F2C155DA 7. Remove six Screws [4], and remove the Motor cover [5]. 4038F2C156DA 8. Open the Right Door. 9. Remove three Screws [6], and remove the Reinforcement plate [7] of the right door and spring [8].
  • Page 168 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 6. Other 10. Remove the Shoulder Screw [9]. 4038F2C576DA 11. Remove two Screws [10], and remove the Metal blanking plate [11]. [10] [11] 4038F2C577DA 12. Remove five Screws [12] and the [12] [13] [12] Connector [13], and remove the Rear Handle Assy [14].
  • Page 169 6. Other Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 13. Disconnect four Connectors [15]. [15] [15] [15] [15] 4038F2C579DA 14. Remove the Front Door. [17] [16] See P.84 15. Slide out the Tray 1. 16. Remove two Screws [16], and remove the Front Right Cover [17]. [16] 4038F2C580DA 17.

  • Page 170: Scanner Motor (M201)

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 6. Other 6.3.35 Scanner Motor (M201) A. Removal Procedure 1. Remove the Upper Rear Cover and the IR Upper Rear Cover. See P.82, P.79 2. Remove the Harness from two Wire Saddles [1] and the Edge Cover [2]. 4038F2C128DA 3.
  • Page 171 6. Other Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 5. Remove the Tension spring [7] for the Scanner Motor belt. 4038F2C131DA 6. Disconnect the Connector [8]. 4038F2C132DB 7. Remove three Screws [9], and remove the Scanner Motor Assy [10]. [10] 4038F2C133DB...

  • Page 172: Scanner Assy

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 6. Other 8. Remove two Screws [11], Set screw [12], Damper [13], and remove the [14] Scanner Motor [14]. [12] [13] [11] 4037F2C134DB B. Reinstallation Procedure 1. Temporarily secure the Scanner Motor Assy [2] using three Screws [1].
  • Page 173 6. Other Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 NOTE • Do not remove the Scanner Posi- tioning Screws (red-painted) [3]. 4038F2C521DA 3. Take out the Scanner Assy [4] by turning it in the direction of the arrow shown. 4038F2C522DA 4. Remove the Screw [5], and remove the Holder [6].

  • Page 174: Scanner Drive Cables

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 6. Other 6.3.37 Scanner Drive Cables A. Removal Procedure 1. Remove the Upper Rear Cover. See P.82 2. Remove the Control Panel [1]. See P.86 4038F2C566DA 3. Remove three Presser Bars [2] of Flat Cable. 4038F2C138DA 4.
  • Page 175 6. Other Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 7. Remove the Original Glass. See P.81 8. Remove the Scanner Assy. See P.129 9. Unhook the Springs [7] of the Scan- ner Drive Cables on the hook side, one each at the front and in the rear. 4038F2C550DA 10.
  • Page 176 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 6. Other 14. Snap off the C-clip [14], and remove the Bushing [15] (front). [15] [14] 4038F2C554DA 15. Slide the Shaft [16] toward the rear [17] [16] and lift it. Then, remove the front and rear pulleys [17].
  • Page 177 6. Other Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 (2) Reinstallation Procedure <Front> 1. Position the round bead [1] of the Scanner Drive Cable in the pulley [2] as shown. NOTE • Make sure that the bead snugly rests in the slit in the pulley. 4036fs2554c0 2.
  • Page 178 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 6. Other 6. Wind the fixed bead end of the cable around the pulley five turns clock- wise, from the front toward the rear side. NOTE • Make sure that no part of the cable rides on the other.
  • Page 179 6. Other Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 10. Mount the Scanner drive gear [11] [13] on the shaft [12] and secure it using the screw [13]. [12] NOTE • Allow a clearance of about 0.3 mm between the Scanner drive gear and bushing.
  • Page 180 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 6. Other 14. Wind the hook end of the cable [24] around pulley A [25] and pulley B [26]. [26] [24] [25] 4036fs2566c0 15. Fit the hook end of the cable [27] to the spring [28] and then hook the spring to the catch A in the frame.

  • Page 181: Pwb Box

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 19. Fit the hook end of the cable [37] to the spring [38] and then hook the spring to the catch A in the frame. 20. Measure the Spring length, and check if its length is within the range of 63.0 mm ±...
  • Page 182 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 6. Other 3. Disconnect the Flat Cable [2] on the MFP Control Board, and remove two Presser Bars [3] of Flat Cable. 4038F2C140DA 4. Disconnect the Flat Cable [4] on the Slide Interface Board, and remove the Presser Bar [5] of Flat Cable.
  • Page 183 6. Other Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 6. Disconnect the Connector [7], and remove the Harness from the Wire Saddle [8]. 7. Remove two tabs [9], and remove [10] the Cooling Fan Motor/2 [10]. 4038F2C143DA 8. Remove the Harness [12] from two [12] Wire Saddles [11].
  • Page 184 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 6. Other 10. Disconnect the Connector [15], and remove the Harness from the Wire Saddle [16]. [16] [15] 4038F2C146DA 11. Remove the Screw [17] of the [17] Ground terminal. 4038F2C147DA 12. Remove eight Screws [18], and remove the PWB Box [19].

  • Page 185: Color Developing Motor (M3)

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 6.3.39 Color Developing Motor (M3) 1. Remove the PWB Box. See P.138 2. Remove the Connector [1] and four Screws [2], and remove the Color Developing Motor [3]. 4038F2C149DA 6.3.40 Color PC Drum Motor (M2) 1.

  • Page 186: Toner Supply Motor Y/M (M6)

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 6. Other 6.3.42 Toner Supply Motor Y/M (M6) 1. Remove the PWB Box. See P.138 2. Remove the Connector [1] and two Screws [2], and remove the Toner Supply Motor Y/M [3]. 4038F2C152DA 6.3.43 Main Motor (M1) 1.
  • Page 187 6. Other Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 5. Remove the Screw [3] fixing the IR cable. 4038F2C155DA 6. Remove six Screws [4], and remove the Motor cover [5]. 4038F2C156DA 7. Remove the Connector [6] and four Screws [7], and remove the Main Motor [8].

  • Page 188: Fusing Drive Motor (M4)

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 6. Other 6.3.44 Fusing Drive Motor (M4) 1. Remove the PWB Box. See P.138 2. Remove the IR Right Cover. See P.79 3. Remove the Harness from the Edge Cover [1]. 4038F2C153DA 4. Remove the Harness from the Wire Saddle [2].

  • Page 189: Tray 2 Lift-Up Motor (M3-Pc)

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 6. Remove six Screws [4], and remove the Motor cover [5]. 4038F2C156DA 7. Remove the Connector [6] and two Screws [7], and remove the Fusing Drive Motor [8]. 4038F2C158DA 6.3.45 Tray 2 Lift-Up Motor (M3-PC) 1.

  • Page 190: Tray 2 Paper Feed Motor (M1-Pc)

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 6. Other 5. Disconnect the Connector [3]. 6. Remove three Screws [4], remove and the Tray 2 Lift-Up Motor [5]. 4038F2C166DA 6.3.46 Tray 2 Paper Feed Motor (M1-PC) 1. Pull out the Tray 2. 2.

  • Page 191: Tray 2 Vertical Transport Motor (M2-Pc)

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 6. Remove two Screws [6], and remove the Motor Assy [7]. 4038F2C168DA 7. Remove two Screws [8], and remove the Tray 2 Paper Feed Motor [9]. 4038F2C519DA 6.3.47 Tray 2 Vertical Transport Motor (M2-PC) 1.
  • Page 192 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 6. Other 4. Remove the Harness of the Motor Assy [4] from five Wire Saddles [3]. 5. Disconnect two Connectors [5]. 4038F2C167DA 6. Remove two Screws [6], and remove the Motor Assy [7]. 4038F2C168DA 7.

  • Page 193: Idc/Registration Sensor/1, Idc/Registration Sensor/2 (Se1/Se2)

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 6.3.48 IDC/Registration Sensor/1, IDC/Registration Sensor/2 (SE1/SE2) 1. Remove the Image Transfer Belt Unit. See P.31 2. Remove the Multi Bypass Unit. See P.113 3. Remove the Screw [1], and remove the Plate spring [2]. 4038F2C169DA 4.
  • Page 194 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 6. Other 7. Remove two Screws [9] and Connec- tor [10], and remove the IDC/Regis- tration Sensor/1 [11]. [11] [10] 4038F2C172DA 8. Repeat the step 6 and 7, and remove the IDC/Registration Sensor/2 (rear side) [12].

  • Page 195: Cleaning Procedure

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 Cleaning procedure NOTE • The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure represents the isopropyl alcohol. 6.4.1 PH Window 1. Open the Front Door. 2. Remove the PH Window Cleaning Jig [1]. 4038F2C547DA 3.

  • Page 196: Image Transfer Belt Unit

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 6. Other 6.4.2 Image Transfer Belt Unit 1. Remove the Image Transfer Belt Unit. See P.31 2. Using a dried soft cloth, wipe the Image Transfer Belt [1]. NOTE • If it is difficult to clean with dried soft cloth, dampen a soft cloth with a solvent.

  • Page 197: Bypass Tray Feed Roller

    Tray 1 Separation Roller [3] clean of dirt. 4038F2C176DA 6.4.5 Bypass Tray Feed Roller A. bizhub C250 1. Remove the Multi Bypass Unit. See P.113 2. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the Bypass Tray Feed Roller [1].

  • Page 198: Bypass Tray Separation Roller

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 6. Other 6.4.6 Bypass Tray Separation Roller 1. Remove the Multi Bypass Unit. See P.113 2. Remove the Screws [1], and remove the Ground terminal [2]. 4038F2C009DA 3. Remove the Screw [3], and remove the Bypass Tray Separation Roller Assy [4].

  • Page 199: Tray 2 Feed Roller/Tray 2 Pick-Up Roller

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 6.4.7 Tray 2 Feed Roller/Tray 2 Pick-up Roller 1. Slide out the Tray 2. 2. Open the Vertical transport door. 3. Remove two Claws [1], and remove the Vertical transport door [2]. 4038F2C011DA 4.

  • Page 200: Tray 2 Separation Roller

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 6. Other 6. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the Tray 2 Feed Roller [7] and the Tray 2 Pick-up Roller [8]. 4038F2C179DB 6.4.8 Tray 2 Separation Roller 1. Slide out the Tray 2. 2.

  • Page 201: Tray 2 Transport Roller

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 5. Remove two Screws [5] and the Tray 2 Separation Roller installation plate Assy [6]. 4038F2C013DA 6. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the Tray 2 Separation Roller [7]. 4038F2C523DA 6.4.9 Tray 2 Transport Roller 1.

  • Page 202: Scanner Rail

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 6. Other 6.4.10 Scanner Rail 1. Remove three Screws [1] and the IR Upper Right Cover [2]. 4038F2C503DA 2. Remove two Screws [3] and two Original Glass fixing brackets [4] (at the front and rear). 3.

  • Page 203: Mirrors (1St/2Nd/3Rd)

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 6.4.11 Mirrors (1st/2nd/3rd) 1. Remove the Original Glass. See P.81 2. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the Mirror 1 [1] and Mirror 2/3 [2]. 4038F2C506DA 6.4.12 Lens 1. Remove the Original Glass. See P.81 2.

  • Page 204: Original Glass

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 6. Other 6.4.13 Original Glass 1. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the Original Glass [1] clean of dirt. 4038F2C183DA 6.4.14 CCD Sensor 1. Remove the Original Glass. See P.81 2. Remove seven Screws [1] and CCD Unit protective cover [2].
  • Page 205 6. Other Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 4. Using a soft lint free cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the CCD Sensor [5] clean of dirt. 4038F2C137DA...

  • Page 206: Mount The Original Size Detecting Sensor/2 (Pc204)

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 6. Other Mount the original size detecting sensor/2 (PC204) 1. Remove the Original glass. 2. Using the screw [2], mount the Origi- nal Size Detection Sensor/2 (PC204) [1] and fix it. 4037F2C113DB <How to set the Harness> PC203 PC204 4037F2C114DB...
  • Page 207 6. Other Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 3. Select [Service Mode] → [System 1] → [Original Size Detection], and set the Original Glass to [Table2]. 4037F2E530DA 4. Select [Service Mode] → [Machine] → [Org. Size Detecting Sensor Adj]. See P.300 5.

  • Page 208: Option Counter

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 6. Other Option counter 6.6.1 Installation method for the Key Counter 1. cut out the Knockouts [1] of the Upper Rear Cover. 2. Remove the Upper Rear Cover. See P.82 4038F2C569DA 3. Pass the Key Counter Harness [2] through the hole.
  • Page 209 6. Other Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 7. Using four screws [8], secure the Counter Mounting Bracket [7]. NOTE • Secure the Counter Mounting Bracket passing the connector into the bracket. • Use the four long screws (9646 0418 14: M4x18) in the Key Counter Kit to secure the Counter Mounting Bracket.
  • Page 210 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 6. Other 11. Fix the harness [15] with the cable [14] clamp [14] as shown in the left figure. 12. Select Service Mode → [Billing Set- ting] → [Management Function [15] Choice] → [Key Counter]. Press [Set], and set Color Mode and Mes- sage.
  • Page 211 6. Other Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 Blank Page...

  • Page 212: Adjustment/Setting

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 7. How to use the adjustment section Adjustment/Setting How to use the adjustment section • “Adjustment/Setting” contains detailed information on the adjustment items and proce- dures for this machine. • Throughout this “Adjustment/Setting,” the default settings are indicated by “ ”. Advance Checks •...

  • Page 213: Utility Mode

    8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 Utility Mode Touch Panel Adjustment Functions • To adjust the position of the Touch Panel display • Make this adjustment if the Touch Panel is slow to respond to a pressing action. •...

  • Page 214: Utility Mode Function Tree

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 8. Utility Mode Utility Mode function tree * The function tree is shown to comply with the format displayed on the screen. NOTE • Keys displayed on screens are different depending on the setting. •...
  • Page 215 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 Utility Mode Ref. page User Setting Display Sub Screen Display ON/OFF P.189 Setting Scan Basic Default Tab P.189 Screen Program Default P.190 Default Address Book Default Index P.190 Seeing Address Type Symbol Display P.190 Fax Basic Default Tab...
  • Page 216 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 8. Utility Mode Utility Mode Ref. page User Setting Printer Paper Setting Paper Tray P.197 Setting Default Paper Size P.197 2-Sided Print P.198 Bind Direction P.198 Staple P.198 Hole-Punch P.198 Banner Paper Tray P.198 PCL Setting Font Setting P.199...
  • Page 217 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 Utility Mode Ref. page Administrator System Restrict User Restrict Access to Saved Program Jobs P.206 Setting Setting Access Delete Saved Program Jobs P.206 Restrict Changing Job Priority P.206 Access to Job Deleting Other User’s Jobs P.206 Settings...
  • Page 218 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 8. Utility Mode Utility Mode Ref. page Administrator System Expert Scanner Leading Edge Adjustment *** P.217 Setting Setting Adjustment Adjustment Centering *** P.218 Horizontal Adjustment *** P.219 Vertical Adjustment *** P.220 ADF Adjust- Centering*** P.220 ment *** Original Stop Position***...
  • Page 219 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 Utility Mode Ref. page Administrator One-Touch Address Book Addr. Dial P.228 Setting Registration E-Mail P.228 User Box P.228 IP Address Fax Destination P.229 Internet Fax Address P.229 Group P.229 Program P.229 Subject/Text Subject P.229...
  • Page 220 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 8. Utility Mode Utility Mode Ref. page Administrator Network Detail Setting Device Setting P.254 Setting Setting Time Adjustment Setting P.254 Status Notifi- Notification Address Setting P.255 cation Setting Notification Item Setting P.255 Notification Time Setting P.255 Total Counter Report Setting P.255...
  • Page 221 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 Utility Mode Ref. page Administrator Fax Setting TX/RX Duplex Print (RX) P.267 Setting Setting Inch Paper Priority Over A4 P.267 Print Paper Selection P.267 Print Paper Size P.268 Incorrect User Box No. Entry P.268 Tray Selection for RX Print P.268...
  • Page 222 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 8. Utility Mode Utility Mode Ref. page Administrator Fax Setting Multi Lines Telephone Dialing Method P.275 Setting Setting Line Setting Number of RX Call Rings P.276 Line Monitor Sound P.276 Function PC-FAX TX Setting P.276 Setting Multi Lines Setting...
  • Page 223 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 Utility Mode Ref. page  Meter Count Details Print  Toner Coverage  Copy  Print  Scan/Fax  Other...

  • Page 224: Utility Mode Function Setting Procedure

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 8. Utility Mode Utility Mode function setting procedure 8.3.1 Procedure 1. Press the Utility/Counter key. 2. The Utility mode screen will appear. 4037F3E522DA 8.3.2 Exiting • Touch the [Close] key. 8.3.3 Changing the setting value in Utility Mode functions •...

  • Page 225: One-Touch Registration

    8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 One-Touch Registration • It will not be displayed during the User Authentication by the External Server or MFP. 8.4.1 Scan • It will not be displayed when the Authentication Device is set to “Set” by the following set- ting.

  • Page 226: Fax

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 8. Utility Mode C. Program Functions • To register/change the Scan Program. Setting/ • Select any program No. to check, edit, or delete the setting. Procedure D. Subject/Text (for E-mail) (1) Subject Functions • To register the e-mail subject when transmitting the scanned data. Setting/ •...
  • Page 227 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 (4) IP Address Destination • Setting will be available only when [IP Address FAX] is set to “ON” in the following set- tings. [Administrator Setting] → [Network Setting] → [Network Fax Setting] → [Network Fax Function Settings] Functions •...
  • Page 228 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 8. Utility Mode (2) Text Functions • To register the e-mail message when transmitting the Fax original. Setting/ • A new message can be registered by touching [New]. Procedure • Select any displayed message to detail check or delete the setting. •...

  • Page 229: User Setting

    8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 User Setting 8.5.1 System Setting A. Language Selection Functions • To select the language on the LCD display. • To change the language on the control panel to another language. Setting/ •...
  • Page 230 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 8. Utility Mode (4) Print Lists • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that Authentication Device or the Vendor is mounted. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] (It will be displayed when the Key Counter is mounted.) Functions •...
  • Page 231 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 F. Output Setting • It will be displayed only when the following setting is set to “Level 2”. [Administrator Setting] → [Security Setting] → [Administrator Security Level] • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that Authentication Device or the Vendor is mounted.

  • Page 232: Display Setting

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 8. Utility Mode (3) Bin Setting (bizhub C252 only) • It will be displayed only when the optional mailbin kit MT-501 is mounted. Functions • Assign the first exit tray (tray 1) of the finisher to the mailbin 5, and the second exit tray (tray 2) to the mailbin 6.
  • Page 233 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 (2) Program Default Functions • To set the default display for the program screen during Scanner mode. • To keep the default display on the program screen which frequently changes during scanner mode Setting/ •...
  • Page 234 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 8. Utility Mode (3) Address Book Default Index Functions • To set the default display for abbreviation/address screen during Fax mode. • To keep the default display instead of abbreviations/address search string which fre- quently changes during Fax mode.
  • Page 235 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 E. Fax Active Screen • It will be displayed only when the optional FAX kit (FK-502) is mounted. • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that Key Counter, Vendor, or Authentication Device is mounted.

  • Page 236: Initial Setting

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 8. Utility Mode 8.5.3 Initial Setting • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that Authentication Device or Vendor is mounted. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] Functions •...
  • Page 237 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 C. Auto Zoom for Combine/Booklet Functions • To set whether to select the appropriate magnification when Combine or Booklet is selected during Auto Paper Select. • To cancel selecting the appropriate magnification when Combine or Booklet is selected during Auto Paper Select.
  • Page 238 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 8. Utility Mode H. Specify Default Tray when APS Off Functions • To set the Tray to be used when APS is cancelled. • To set the Tray for the initial setting when APS is cancelled. Setting/ •...

  • Page 239: Scanner Setting

    8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 8.5.5 Scanner Setting A. JPEG Compression Level Functions • To set the JPEG Compression method when scanning with JPEG while in Scanner mode. • To change the compression rate when JPEG scanning. High Quality : Lowers the compression rate and puts priority in quality while scanning.
  • Page 240 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 8. Utility Mode (3) Original Direction Functions • To set the default setting for the direction of the original during PC printing. Setting/ • The default setting is Portrait. Procedure “Portrait” Landscape (4) Spool Print Jobs in HDD before RIP Functions •...
  • Page 241 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 (3) 2-Sided Print Functions • To set whether to carry out duplex print during PC printing when not specified by the printer driver. • To use when 2-sided printing cannot be specified by the printer driver while printing by Windows DOS, etc.
  • Page 242 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 8. Utility Mode C. PCL Setting (1) Font Setting Functions • To set the font when not specified by the printer driver during PC printing. • To use when the printer driver cannot specify the font during printing from Windows DOS, etc.
  • Page 243 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 (5) CR/LF Mapping Functions • To set the mode for replacing data when printing the text data. • To change the mode for replacing data when printing the text data. Mode 1 : Replacing CR with CR-LF Mode 2 : Replacing LF with CR-LF Mode 3 : Replacing with CR-LF : Does not replace...

  • Page 244: Change Password

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 8. Utility Mode 8.5.7 Change Password • When conducting User Authentication, it will be displayed only when the Authentication is complete. Functions • To modify the Password used for the User Authentication. • To modify the User Authentication Password currently used. Setting/ •...

  • Page 245: Administrator Setting

    8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 Administrator Setting • The Administrator setting will be available by entering the administrator password (8 dig- its) set by the administrator setting or Service Mode. (The administrator password is initially set to “12345678.”) NOTE •...
  • Page 246 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 8. Utility Mode (4) Entering Power Save Mode (Fax) • It will be displayed only when the optional FAX kit (FK-502) is mounted. Functions • To set whether to immediately switch to the Power Save Mode after printing in case of receiving the Fax during Power Save Mode.
  • Page 247 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 (3) Bin Setting (bizhub C252 only) • It will be displayed only when the optional mailbin kit MT-501 is mounted. Functions • Assign the first exit tray (tray 1) of the finisher to the mailbin 5, and the second exit tray (tray 2) to the mailbin 6.
  • Page 248 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 8. Utility Mode E. Weekly Timer Setting • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that Vendor 1 or Vendor 2 is mounted. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] (1) Weekly Timer ON/OFF Setting Functions •...
  • Page 249 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 F. Restrict User Access • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that Vendor 1 is mounted. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] (1) Restrict Access to Saved Program Jobs Functions •...
  • Page 250 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 8. Utility Mode <Changing Zoom Ratio> Functions • To set whether to allow or restrict the change on the registered magnification. • To prohibit the change on registered magnification. Setting/ • The default setting is Allow. Procedure “Allow”...
  • Page 251 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 (2) Printer Adjustment <Leading Edge Adjustment> Functions • To vary the print start position in the sub scan direction for each of different paper types in Tray 1. • The PH Unit has been replaced. •...
  • Page 252 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 8. Utility Mode <Centering> Functions • To vary the print start position in the main scan direction for each paper source. • The PH Unit has been replaced. • A paper feed unit has been added. •...
  • Page 253 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 <Centering (Duplex 2nd Side)> Functions • To vary the print start position in the main scan direction for each paper source in the 2-Sided mode. • To use when the optional Automatic Duplex Unit AD-503 is set up. •...
  • Page 254 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 8. Utility Mode <Media Adjustment> Functions • Adjust the 2nd image transfer output (ATVC) on the 1st page and the 2nd page for each paper type. • This function is provided to open [Transfer Output Fine Adjustment] → [2nd Transfer Adjust] of Service Mode up to Administrator and the fine-adjusted value is reflected in the Service Mode setting.
  • Page 255 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 (4) Density Adjustment <Thick Paper Image Density-Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, Black> Functions • To fine-adjust density of printed images of each color for thick paper and OHP trans- parencies. • To change the density of the printed image for each color with thick paper and OHP transparencies Adjustment Lighter (5 steps), “Std”, Darker (5 steps)
  • Page 256 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 8. Utility Mode <Initialize+Image Stabilization> Functions • To carry out an image stabilization sequence after the historical data of image stabili- zation control has been initialized. • Use if an image problem persists even after Gradation Adjustment has been exe- cuted.
  • Page 257 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 (6) Color Registration Adjust • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that Management Device 1 is mounted during the device power is OFF or no authentication is set. [Service Mode] →...
  • Page 258 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 8. Utility Mode (7) Gradation Adjustment • It will not be displayed when the following setting is set to “ON”. [Service Mode] → [Imaging Process Adjustment] → [Dev. Bias Choice] • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that Management Device 1 is mounted during the device power is OFF or no authentication is set.
  • Page 259 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 (8) Scanner Adjustment • Use the following Color Chart for the adjustment of the Scanner Section. • If the Color Chart is not available, a scale may be used instead. • It will be displayed only when the following setting is set to “Level 2”. [Service Mode] →...
  • Page 260 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 8. Utility Mode <Leading Edge Adjustment> Functions • To adjust variations in mounting accuracy and sensitivity of the Scanner Home Sen- sor and in mounting accuracy of the Original Width Scale by varying the scan start position in the main scan direction.
  • Page 261 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 <Centering> Functions • To adjust part-to-part variations in accuracy of IR parts and their mounting accuracy by varying the scan start position in the main scan direction. • When the CCD Unit is replaced. •...
  • Page 262 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 8. Utility Mode <Horizontal Adjustment> Functions • To adjust the zoom ratio in the main scan direction for the Scanner Section • The CCD Unit has been replaced. Adjustment •Measure C width on the color chart and on Specification the sample copy, and adjust the gap to be within the following specification.
  • Page 263 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 <Vertical Adjustment> Functions • To adjust the zoom ratio in the sub scan direction for the Scanner Section • The Scanner Assy has been replaced. • The Scanner Motor has been replaced. •...
  • Page 264 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 8. Utility Mode <Original Stop Position> Functions • To make a manual adjustment of the document stop position and scanning position in each of the ADF modes. • To use when the “Auto Adj. of Stop Position” cannot make adjustment completely. Setting/ 1.
  • Page 265 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 <Auto Adj. of Stop Position: Front> Functions • Adjust the document stop position for the first side. • Check for skew. • Upon setup of the ADF Setting/ 1. Call the Administrator Setting to the Procedure screen.
  • Page 266 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 8. Utility Mode H. List/Counter (1) Management List • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that Vendor is mounted. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] (It will be displayed when the Key counter is mounted or when the following setting shows that switch No.33 is set to [01] at HEX assignment.
  • Page 267 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 Reset Setting (1) System Auto Reset Functions • To set the period of time until System Auto Reset starts functioning. • To change the period of time until System Auto Reset starts functioning. Setting/ <Priority Mode>...
  • Page 268 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 8. Utility Mode <When NEXT JOB is selected: Staple Setting> Functions • To set whether to cancel the staple setting when the Staple setting job started and the next job setting has become available. Setting/ •...

  • Page 269: Administrator/Machine Setting

    8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 K. Standard Size Setting • It will be displayed only when the following setting is set to “Level 2”. [Service Mode] → [Enhanced Security] → [Administrator Feature Level] (1) Original Glass Original Size Detect Functions •...

  • Page 270: One-Touch Registration

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 8. Utility Mode 8.6.3 One-Touch Registration A. Scan • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that Authentication Device is mounted. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] (1) Address Book <E-Mail>...
  • Page 271 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 (4) Subject/Text (for E-mail) <Subject> Functions • To register the e-mail subject for transmitting the scanned data by e-mail. Setting/ • Touch [New] to register the new subject. Procedure • Select any displayed subject to detail check, edit, or delete the setting. •...
  • Page 272 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 8. Utility Mode <IP Address Fax Destination> • Setting will be available only when [IP Address FAX] is set to “ON” in the following set- tings. [Administrator Setting] → [Network Setting] → [Network Fax Setting] → [Network Fax Function Settings] Functions •...
  • Page 273 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 <Text> Functions • To register the e-mail message for transmitting the Fax original by e-mail. Setting/ • Touch [New] to register the new message. Procedure • Select any displayed message to detail check or delete the setting. •...
  • Page 274 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 8. Utility Mode D. One-Touch Registration List • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that Vendor is mounted. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] (It will be displayed when the Key counter is mounted.) (1) Address Book List Functions •...

  • Page 275: User Authentication/Account Track

    8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 8.6.4 User Authentication/Account Track • It will not be displayed when the following setting is not set to [Unset]. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] A. General Settings (1) User Authentication Functions •...
  • Page 276 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 8. Utility Mode (4) Account Track Input Method Functions • To set the Authentication method for the Account Track. • To select whether to authenticate by password or by account name & password. Setting/ •...
  • Page 277 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 B. User Authentication Setting • The settings are available only when carrying out the User Authentication. (1) Administrative Setting <User Name List> • It cannot select [OFF] when the following setting is set to “ON”. [Administrator Setting] →...
  • Page 278 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 8. Utility Mode (3) User Counter Functions • To display the status of use of the copier, printer, scanner, and Fax for each user. • To check the status of use of the copier, printer, scanner, and Fax for each user. Setting/ 1.

  • Page 279: Network Setting

    8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 8.6.5 Network Setting A. TCP/IP Setting (1) TCP/IP Setting Functions • To set whether to enable or disable TCP/IP setting. • To disable TCP/IP setting. Setting/ • The default setting is ON. Procedure “ON”...
  • Page 280 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 8. Utility Mode (5) Default Gateway • It cannot be set when [IP Address Setting Method] is set to “Auto Input”. Functions • To set the gateway address of the device used in the network. •...
  • Page 281 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 (11) DNS Search Domain Name1 to 3 Functions • To set the DNS Search Domain Name. • To enter the DNS Search Domain Name. Setting/ 1. Touch [DNS Search Domain Name 1 to 3]. Procedure 2.
  • Page 282 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 8. Utility Mode B. NetWare Setting (1) IPX Setting Functions • To enable or disable the NetWare (IPX) setting. • To use NetWare (IPX) setting. Setting/ • The default setting is ON. Procedure “ON” (2) Ethernet Frame Type Functions •...
  • Page 283 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 (7) Polling Interval Functions • To set the Polling interval. • To set the interval to search the print queue. Setting/ 1. Press the Clear key. Procedure 2. Enter the Polling interval between 1 and 65535 using the 10-Key Pad. (8) NDS/Bindery Setting Functions •...
  • Page 284 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 8. Utility Mode (13) Printer Number Functions • To set the Printer number. • To set the Printer number. Setting/ 1. Touch [Auto] and cancel the reverse display. Procedure 2. Press the Clear key. 3.
  • Page 285 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 (6) Printer Information Functions • To set the Printer information. • To set the Printer information. Setting/ 1. Touch [Printer Information]. Procedure 2. Enter the Printer Name, Printer Location, and Printer Information on the on-screen keyboard.
  • Page 286 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 8. Utility Mode D. FTP Setting (1) Proxy Server Address Functions • To set the Proxy server address. • To enter the Proxy server address. Setting/ • IP address Version 4 format Procedure [0 to 255] . [0 to 255] . [0 to 255] . [0 to 255] 1.
  • Page 287 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 (6) FTP Server Functions • To set whether to use FTP server or not. • Not to use FTP server. Setting/ • The default setting is ON. Procedure “ON” NOTE • [ON] cannot be selected when the following setting is set to “ON”. [Administrator Setting] →...
  • Page 288 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 8. Utility Mode (6) WINS Setting Functions • To set whether or not to enable the WINS setting. • To use the WINS (Windows Internet Name Service) setting is necessary. • By using the WINS, the traffic by broadcast can be reduced, and the communication becomes available with the network where broadcast does not reach.
  • Page 289 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 (11) NTLM Setting Functions • To set the NTLM Version for the User Authentication. • To use when changing the NTLM Version for User Authentication. • NTLM has v1 and v2. Select the Version which suits the network environment. Setting/ •...
  • Page 290 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 8. Utility Mode (2) Setting Up LDAP • Registration and/or setting concerning the LDAP Server can be conducted. • Touch [Setting Up LDAP], and select the optional blank key to register and/or set. <LDAP Server Name> Functions •...
  • Page 291 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 <Reset All Settings> Functions • To return the contents registered in the LDAP server to what they were prior to the shipping. Setting/ 1. Touch [Reset All Settings]. Procedure 2. Check the message and touch [Yes]. <Server Address>...
  • Page 292 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 8. Utility Mode <Authentication Method> Functions • To set the authentication method to logon to LDAP server. • To change the authentication method to logon to LDAP server. anonymous : User name and password are not necessary (Dynamic Authentication will be invalid when anonymous is selected.) Simple...
  • Page 293 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 <Password> Functions • To set the password for connecting to LDAP server. • To set the password for connecting to LDAP server. Setting/ • Touch [Password]. Procedure • Enter the password (up to 63 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK]. NOTE •...
  • Page 294 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 8. Utility Mode <Meter Count Notification> • It will not be displayed when [E-Mail TX Setting] is set to “Restrict”. Functions • To set whether or not to inform the total counter by E-Mail. •...
  • Page 295 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 <SSL Setting> Functions • To set whether or not to use SSL when sending an E-Mail. • To use when sending an E-Mail using SSL. Setting/ • The default setting is OFF. Procedure “OFF”...
  • Page 296 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 8. Utility Mode (2) E-Mail RX (POP) <E-Mail RX Setting> Functions • To set whether to enable or disable the e-mail reception setting. • To disable the e-mail reception setting. Setting/ • The default setting is ON. Procedure “ON”...
  • Page 297 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 <Detail Setting: Connection Timeout> Functions • To set the timeout period for connection in receiving e-mail to POP server. • To set the timeout period of connection in receiving e-mail to POP server. Setting/ •...
  • Page 298 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 8. Utility Mode <Port No.> Functions • To set the Port No. for transmitting with NTP server. • To enter the Port No. for transmitting with NTP server. Setting/ 1. Press the Clear key. Procedure 2.
  • Page 299 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 <Set Notification Addresses> Functions • To set the E-Mail Address for reporting the total counter value. • Up to three E-Mail Addresses can be set. • It can be selected whether to apply the schedule of the [Set Schedule] to each address.
  • Page 300 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 8. Utility Mode (8) Prefix/Suffix Setting <ON/OFF Setting> Functions • To set whether to add Prefix or Suffix to the address when calling or entering an address. • To add Prefix or Suffix to the address. Setting/ •...
  • Page 301 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 (3) SNMP v1/v2c Setting Functions • To conduct setting when using SNMP v1/v2c. • To use when changing Write setting. • To use when entering the Community Name for reading the Management Information (MIB) and writing to it.
  • Page 302 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 8. Utility Mode <Read User Name> Functions • To set the read-only User name used for SNMP v3. Setting/ 1. Touch [Name]. Procedure 2. Enter the Read User Name (up to 32 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].
  • Page 303 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 <Security Level> Functions • To set the security level for the Reading/Writing Authority User which is used for SNMP v3. • To use for changing the security level of the Reading/Writing Authority User. Authentication OFF : Authentication will not be conducted when Reading/Writing Authority User accesses.
  • Page 304 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 8. Utility Mode L. TCP Socket Setting (1) TCP Socket Setting Functions • To set whether or not to set the TCP Socket. • To use when using the application, etc. for TCP Socket transmission. Setting/ •...
  • Page 305 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 M. Network Fax Setting (1) Network Fax Function Settings • It will not be displayed on the screen when all items are set to “OFF” in the following set- tings. [Service Mode] → [System 2] → [Network Fax Settings] <IP Address Fax>...
  • Page 306 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 8. Utility Mode (3) SMTP RX Setting Functions • To set SMTP RX when network fax function is being used. • To use SMTP RX function when network fax function is being used. • To set SMTP RX port number and connecting time out period when network fax func- tion is being used.
  • Page 307 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 D. Select Tray for Insert Sheet Functions • To select the initial value for the Tray for the Cover sheet paper. Setting/ • The default setting is Tray 2. Procedure E. Print Jobs During Copy Operation Functions •...
  • Page 308 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 8. Utility Mode 8.6.8 Fax Setting • Settings are available only when the Optional FAX kit (FK-502) is mounted. • It will not be displayed when the following setting is set to “ON”. [Administrator Setting] → [System Connection] → [Prefix/Suffix Auto Setting] A.
  • Page 309 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 C. Telephone Line Settings (1) Dialing Method Functions • To set the Dialing method. • To change the dialing method. • The displays are different depending on the country. Setting/ • The default setting is PB. Procedure “PB”...
  • Page 310 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 8. Utility Mode (6) Line Monitor Sound Functions • To set whether to output the Line monitor sound from the speaker or not. Setting/ • The default setting is ON. Procedure “ON” (7) Line Monitor Sound Volume Functions •...
  • Page 311 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 (4) Print Paper Size Functions • To set the paper size to print the text when receiving Fax. • To change the paper size for printing the received text. • The displays are different depending on the country. •...
  • Page 312 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 8. Utility Mode (9) File After Polling TX Functions • To set whether to delete the original which Polling transmission has been completed. • For not deleting the original which polling transmission has been completed. Setting/ •...
  • Page 313 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 <Relay Print> • It will be displayed when the following setting is set to “ON”. [Service Mode] → [FAX] → [System] → [Display Setting] → [Relay] Functions • To set whether to use the relay print function. •...
  • Page 314 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 8. Utility Mode (4) Forward TX Setting • It will not be displayed when [PC-FAX RX Setting], [Memory RX] or [TSI User Box Set- ting] is set to “ON”. • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that Vendor or Authentication Device is mounted.
  • Page 315 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 (7) TSI User Box Setting • It will not be displayed when [Forward TX Setting], [Memory RX] or [PC-Fax RX Setting] is set to “ON”. Functions • To set whether to use TSI distribution or not. •...
  • Page 316 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 8. Utility Mode (3) Sequential TX Report Functions • To set whether to print out the Sequential TX Report or not. • To print out the Sequential TX Report. Setting/ • The default setting is ON. Procedure “ON”...
  • Page 317 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 (9) PC-Fax TX Error Report • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that Management Device 2 is mounted. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] Functions •...
  • Page 318 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 8. Utility Mode (14) DSN Message • Settings will be available only when [Internet Fax] is set to “ON” in the following settings. [Administrator Setting] → [Network Setting] → [Network Fax Setting] → [Network Fax Function Settings] Functions •...
  • Page 319 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 <Number of Rx Call Rings> Functions • To set the number of Rx call rings for the expanded line. • To change the number of artificial ring back tones with expanded line when receiving calls until it starts receiving operation.
  • Page 320 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 8. Utility Mode J. Network Fax Setting • It will be displayed only when either [IP Address Fax] or [Internet Fax] is set to “ON” in the following settings. [Administrator Setting] → [Network Setting] → [Network Fax Setting] → [Network Fax Function Settings] (1) Black Compression Level •...

  • Page 321: System Connection

    8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 (3) I-Fax Advanced Settings • It will be displayed only when [Internet Fax] is set to “ON” in the following settings. [Administrator Setting] → [Network Setting] → [Network Fax Setting] → [Network Fax Function Settings] Functions •...

  • Page 322: Security Setting

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 8. Utility Mode (3) SSL • It will be displayed when certificate is issued from Pagescope Web Connection. Functions • To set whether to encrypt access from other systems by SSL when using Page Scope Data Administrator.
  • Page 323 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 B. User Box Admin. Setting Functions • To set whether to allow or restrict the Box Administrator to use the system. • To allow the Box Administrator to use the system. The Box Administrator is the special administrator for box, who is allowed to browse contents in Common Box / Individual Box without the password.
  • Page 324 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 8. Utility Mode D. Security Details (1) Password Rules Functions • To set whether to apply the Password rules. • To apply the password rule to enhance security. • Passwords to be covered: Password for CE, Administrator, Box user authentication, Fax confidential print, Classified document, User authenti- cation, Box transmission, Account Track and Box Admin.
  • Page 325 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 (2) Prohibit Functions When Auth. Error Functions • To set the function for prohibiting Authentication operation in order to prevent the unauthorized access. • To use when setting the system to prohibit Authentication failure when conducting Authentication by Password, etc.
  • Page 326 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 8. Utility Mode (5) Secure Document Access Method Functions • To display the status of the Authentication system on the control panel for the Confi- dential document access. • It cannot be changed at the operator’s option since it will automatically be set accord- ing to the [Prohibit Functions When Auth.
  • Page 327 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 NOTE • Setting the Security enhancement “ON” will change the setting values for the fol- lowing functions. Name of the Function Default Setting When Security Enhancement Setting is ON Password Rules ON (Cannot be changed) Prohibit Functions When Mode 2 (Cannot be changed) Set to three times...
  • Page 328 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 8. Utility Mode (2) Temporary Data Overwrite Setting • When the image becomes unnecessary, Temporary Data Overwrite function will write meaningless data over all area where images are stored, and destroy the image data itself.
  • Page 329 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 (3) Overwrite All Data Functions • To delete the whole data in the hard disk by overwriting. • To initialize the area of use for the User stored in NVRAM. • To use when disposing of the Hard Disk. •...
  • Page 330 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 8. Utility Mode (6) HDD Encryption Setting • It can be set only when the optional Security Kit (SC-503) is mounted. Functions • To set Encryption key necessary to mount the optional Security Kit SC-503. •...
  • Page 331 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 (3) Network Function Setting Functions • To set whether to use Network function or not when Management function has been set. • Not to use the Network function whose counter is difficult to be managed when Man- agement function has been set.

  • Page 332: Banner Printing

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 8. Utility Mode Banner Printing Functions • To shift to the Banner Printing Mode. • To use when printing on the long paper. Setting/ 1. When the Finisher is mounted, move it to the specified position. Procedure 2.

  • Page 333: Adjustment Item List

    9. Adjustment item list Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 Adjustment item list Replacement Part/Service Job Adjustment/Setting Items ❍ Print Positioning: Leading Edge Printer ❍ Print Positioning: Side Edge Area Dup Print Positioning: Side Image position: Leading Edge Machine Image position: Side Edge Scan Area Cross Direction Adjustment...
  • Page 334 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 9. Adjustment item list ✽ This table shows the adjustment items that are required when a part of the machine has been replaced. Priority order, if applicable, during the adjustment procedures is indicated by the corresponding number in the parentheses. ❍...
  • Page 335 10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 10. Service Mode 10.1 Service Mode function setting procedure NOTE • Ensure appropriate security for Service mode function setting procedures. They should NEVER be shown to any unauthorized person not involved with service jobs.
  • Page 336 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 10. Service Mode B. Exiting • Touch the [Exit] key. C. Changing the Setting Value in Service Mode Functions • Use the [+] / [-] key to enter or change the setting value. • Use the 10-Key Pad to enter the setting value. (To change the setting value, first press the Clear key before making an entry.)

  • Page 337: Service Mode Function Tree

    10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 10.2 Service Mode function tree ✽ The function tree is shown to comply with the format displayed on the screen. *1: Settings are available only when the Optional FAX Kit (FK-502) is mounted. *2: It will be displayed only when the optional Fax Multi Line (ML-501) is mounted.
  • Page 338 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 10. Service Mode System 1 Initialization P.337 Communication System Setting P.338 System 2 P.338 Image Controller Setting P.339 Option Board Status P.339 Consumable Life Reminder P.339 Unit Change P.340 Software Switch Setting P.340 Scan Calibration P.340 LCT Paper Size Setting P.340...
  • Page 339 10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 State Confirmation Memory/HDD Adj. Memory Check P.361 Compress / Decompression P.361 Check Memory Bus Check P.362 Work Memory In/Out Check P.362 HDD Version Up P.362 HDD R/W Check P.363 HDD Format P.363 HDD Version Down P.364...
  • Page 340 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 10. Service Mode Finisher Center staple position P.369 (only when the FS-501/FS-603 is mounted) Fold position (only when the FS-501/FS-603 is mounted) Fold & Staple Pos. Adjustment (bizhub C252 only) Finisher Check (bizhub C252 only) Punch Regist Loop Size (bizhub C252 only) Punch Horizontal Position (bizhub C252 only) Internet ISW...

  • Page 341: Date/Time Input Mode

    10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 10.3 Date/Time Input mode • This mode is used to set time-of-day and date. 10.3.1 Date & Time Setting mode screen 4038F3E510DA A. Date & Time Setting mode setting procedure 1. Call the Service Mode to the screen. 2.

  • Page 342: Fusing Temperature

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 10. Service Mode 10.4 Machine 10.4.1 Fusing Temperature Functions • To adjust individually the temperature of the Heating Roller and the Fusing Pressure Roller for each type of paper, thereby coping with varying fusing performance under changing environmental conditions.

  • Page 343: Fusing Transport Speed

    10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 10.4.2 Fusing Transport Speed Functions • To adjust the speed of the Fusing Drive Motor so as to match the fusing speed with transport speed. • Brush effect or blurred image is evident as a result of changes in environmental con- ditions or degraded durability.

  • Page 344: Printer Area

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 10. Service Mode 10.4.4 Printer Area A. Print Positioning: Leading Edge Functions • To vary the print start position in the sub scan direction for each of different paper types in Tray 1. • The PH Unit has been replaced. •...
  • Page 345 10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 B. Print Positioning: Side Edge Functions • To vary the print start position in the main scan direction for each paper source. • The PH Unit has been replaced. • A paper feed unit has been added. •...
  • Page 346 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 10. Service Mode C. Dup Print Positioning: Side Edge Functions • To vary the print start position in the main scan direction for each paper source in the 2-Sided mode. • The image on the backside of the 2-sided copy deviates in the main scan direction. Adjustment Width A •Width A on the test pattern produced should...

  • Page 347: Scan Area

    10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 10.4.5 Scan Area • Use the following Color Chart for the adjustment of the Scanner Section. • If the Color Chart is not available, a scale may be used instead. • A: Image Position: Side Edge COLOR CHART COLOR CHART •...
  • Page 348 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 10. Service Mode B. Image Position: Side Edge Functions • To adjust part-to-part variations in accuracy of IR parts and their mounting accuracy by varying the scan start position in the main scan direction. •...
  • Page 349 10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 C. Cross Direction Adjustment Functions • To adjust the zoom ratio in the main scan direction for the Scanner Section • The CCD Unit has been replaced. Adjustment •Measure C width on the color chart and on Specification the sample copy, and adjust the gap to be within the following specification.

  • Page 350: Printer Resist Loop

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 10. Service Mode D. Feed Direction Adjustment Functions • To adjust the zoom ratio in the sub scan direction for the Scanner Section • The Scanner Assy has been replaced. • The Scanner Motor has been replaced. •...

  • Page 351: Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug

    10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 10.4.7 Color Registration Adjustment A. Cyan, Magenta, Yellow Functions • To adjust color shift if there is any when comparing the original with copy of the plain or thick paper. • To correct any color shift Adjustment “0”...

  • Page 352: Fusing Loop Size

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 10. Service Mode 10.4.8 Fusing Loop Size Functions • To vary the timing to start fusing loop processing and adjust the fusing loop size at Envelope printing. • To be used when paper wrinkle or transfer misalignment occur at Envelope printing. Adjustment in +: Delay the timing to start fusing loop processing Adjustment in -: Put ahead the timing to start fusing loop processing Setting/...

  • Page 353: Imaging Process Adjustment

    10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 10.6 Imaging Process Adjustment 10.6.1 Gradation Adjust • It will not be displayed when the following setting is set to “ON”. → → [Service Mode] [Image Process Adjustment] [Dev. Bias Choice] Functions •...

  • Page 354: D Max Density

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 10. Service Mode 10.6.2 D Max Density Functions • To adjust gradation, color, and image density to target reproduction levels by varying the maximum amount of toner sticking to paper through auxiliary manual fine-adjust- ment of gamma of each color after Gradation Adjust.

  • Page 355: Transfer Output Fine Adjustment

    10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 10.6.4 Transfer Output Fine Adjustment A. 2nd Transfer Adjust Functions • Adjust the 2nd image transfer output (ATVC) on the 1st page and the 2nd page for each paper type. • To use when the transfer failure at the trailing edge occurs. Adjustment “0”...
  • Page 356 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 10. Service Mode 10.6.5 Stabilizer A. Stabilization Only Functions • The image stabilization sequence is carried out without clearing the historical data of image stabilization control. • Use if an image problem persists even after Gradation Adjustment has been exe- cuted.

  • Page 357: Thick Paper Density Adjustment

    10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 10.6.6 Thick Paper Density Adjustment Functions • To fine-adjust density of printed images of each color for thick paper and OHP trans- parencies. • To change the density of the printed image for each color with thick paper and OHP transparencies Adjustment Lighter (5 steps), “Std”, Darker (5 steps)

  • Page 358: Dev. Bias Choice

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 10. Service Mode 10.6.9 Dev. Bias Choice Functions • To change the setting of the developing bias voltage • When this function is turned ON, it decreases the developing bias voltage, thereby preventing voltage leak from occurring. •...

  • Page 359: Cs Remote Care

    • For resetting up the machine which CS Remote Care has already been set up, clear the RAM for CS Remote Care before resetting. See P.326 • When using the telephone line for connection, use the recommended modem. (For recommended modem, contact responsible person of KONICA MINOLTA.) Procedure Step Using the telephone...
  • Page 360 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 10. Service Mode Procedure Step Using the telephone Using the Fax line Using E-mail line modem modem *1 Selecting the CS Selecting the CS Selecting the CS Remote Care function Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care] → Remote Care function Remote Care function Select [Service Mode]...
  • Page 361 10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 Procedure Step Using the telephone Using the Fax line Using E-mail line modem modem *1 Inputting the AT com- Proceed to step 11. Setting the E-mail address 1. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care], mand for initializing the modem and touch [Server Set].
  • Page 362 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 10. Service Mode 10.7.3 Software SW setting for CS Remote Care NOTE • SW bits data are written into the NVRAM every time a change is made. In case you changed bit data by accident, be sure to restore the previous state. A.
  • Page 363 10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 SW No. Functions Default SW 05 Modem redial interval 4 to 7 Reservation — — SW 06 Modem redial times Reservation — — SW 07 Redial for response time out Do not redial Redial 1 to 7 Reserved —...
  • Page 364 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 10. Service Mode SW No. Functions Default SW 12 Timer 2 Dial request completed → CONNECT reception SW 13 0 to 7 Reservation — — SW 14 Timer 4 Line connection → Start request telegram delivery SW 15 Timer 5...
  • Page 365 10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 *1: Baud rate Mode 01-7 01-6 01-5 01-4 9600 bps 19200 bps “38400 bps” *2: Modem redial interval Mode 05-3 05-2 05-1 05-0 1 minute 2 minutes “3 minutes” 4 minutes 5 minutes 6 minutes 7 minutes...
  • Page 366 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 10. Service Mode *5: Retransmission times on E-Mail delivery error Mode 09-6 09-5 09-4 09-3 09-2 09-1 09-0 0 to 9 times 000 0000 to 000 1001 “10 times” 11 to 99 times 000 1011 to 110 0011 *6: Timer 1 (RING reception →...
  • Page 367 10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 10.7.4 Setup confirmation • Follow the steps below to make sure that CS Remote Care has been properly set 1. Call the Service Mode to the screen. 2. Touch [CS Remote Care]. 3.

  • Page 368: Detail On Settings

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 10. Service Mode 10.7.8 Detail on settings A. System Selection Functions • To select the system type for remote diagnosis. • Use to newly build or change the system. Setting/ • Select E-Mail, Modem, or Fax. Procedure •...
  • Page 369 10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 (2) Date & Time Setting Functions • To set the data and time-of-day • Use to set or change the date and time-of-day. Setting/ 1. Call the Service Mode to the screen. Procedure 2.
  • Page 370 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 10. Service Mode D. AT Command Functions • To set the command to be issued at the time of Modem Initialization. • This setting is available only when [Modem] is selected for the system setting. •...
  • Page 371 10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 <Mail Check> Functions • To set whether or not to use Mail Check and the time interval for the POP server used for the CS Remote Care. • To set whether or not to use Mail Check and the time interval for the POP server used for the CS Remote Care.
  • Page 372 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 10. Service Mode <SMTP Connection Time-out> Functions • To set the timeout period for transmission. • To change the timeout period for connection during transmission. Setting/ • The default setting is 60 Sec. Procedure “60 Sec”...
  • Page 373 10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 10.7.9 List of the CS Remote Care error code A. When Connecting by Modem Error code Error Solution 0001 The line is busy (Busy detection) • Transmit again manually. 0002 Failure of the Modem default setting at transmit- •...
  • Page 374 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 10. Service Mode Error code Error Solution 001A Device ID inconsistency • Check Device ID setting of the (Device ID of the host is not identical with the one main unit side. of start request telegram.) •...
  • Page 375 10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 B. When connecting by E-Mails Error code Error Solution • Check the SMTP Server on 0001 Connection Timeout during transmission User side. Transmission error • Check the SMTP Server on 0### ***: SMTP responding code (hexadecimal) User side.
  • Page 376 • Check the status of the FASX-CSRC is not allowed. Machine registration on host side. Host command error. • Contact KONICA MINOLTA and inform the error code. NVRAM writing error. • Contact KONICA MINOLTA and inform the error code. NOTE •...
  • Page 377 10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 10.7.10 Troubleshooting for CS Remote Care If communication is not done properly, check the condition by following the procedures shown below. 1. Shift the screen in the order of [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care] → [Detail Setting]. At this time, in the cases of Initial transmitting / Administrator transmitting / Mainte- nance Start transmitting / Maintenance Finish transmitting, the communication result will be displayed at the top of the screen.

  • Page 378: Marketing Area

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 10. Service Mode 10.8 System 1 10.8.1 Marketing Area Functions • To make the various settings (language, paper size, fixed zoom ratios, etc.) according to the applicable marketing area. • Upon setup. Setting/ <Marketing Area> Procedure •...

  • Page 379: No Sleep

    10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 10.8.4 No Sleep Functions • To display the option of “OFF” for the Sleep Mode Setting screen available from Administrator Setting. • To display the option of “OFF” for the Sleep Mode Setting. NOTE •...

  • Page 380: Install Date

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 10. Service Mode 10.8.7 Initialization A. Data Clear Functions • To initialize the setting data. • To clears the setting data. For details on items to be cleared, see “Contents to be cleared by Reset function.” See P.386 NOTE •...

  • Page 381: Communication System Setting

    10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 10.8.9 Communication System Setting Functions • To select communication system used for RS-232C port. • To switch RS-232C port in order to connect with the CS remote care modem or the JScribe- enabled-device.

  • Page 382: Image Controller Setting

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 10. Service Mode 10.9.2 Image Controller Setting Functions • To set the type of the controller. • [Peripheral Mode] appears when [Others] is selected. • When setting up the controller. Setting/ Image Controller Setting Procedure •...

  • Page 383: Unit Change

    10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 10.9.5 Unit Change Functions • To select who is to replace a unit. • When the unit life arrives, the warning display is intended for the specific person who is going to replace the unit. When “User”...

  • Page 384: Line Mag Setting

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 10. Service Mode 10.9.9 Line Mag Setting Functions • To set whether to use the offset value which has been set prior to the shipping. • To be used after replacing the CCD unit. After replacing the CCD unit, the default value needs to be set since the magnifica- tion offset value between the lines set for each unit changes to control the differences in reading performance on each scanner (CCD).

  • Page 385: Data Capture

    10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 10.9.10 Data Capture Functions • When an error occurs, it acquires the print job data in order to analyze the cause of the error. • When an error occurs, this will be used to analyze the cause of the error according to the print job data.
  • Page 386 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 10. Service Mode Setting/ 6. Using the “ls” command, display the list of the file available for capture. Procedure 4037F3E540DA 7. Using the “binary” command, set the File transfer mode to the binary transfer. 4037F3E541DA...

  • Page 387: Network Fax Settings

    10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 Setting/ 8. Using the “get” command, transfer the data for capture to PC. Procedure 4037F3E542DA 9. Finish the command prompt. NOTE • When the data capture is set to [ON], all print job data will be stored in the hard disk.
  • Page 388 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 10. Service Mode 10.10 Counter • The Counter displays the counts of various counters to allow the Technical Representa- tive to check or set as necessary. 10.10.1 Procedure 1. Touch [Counter] to show the Counter menu. 2.

  • Page 389: Service Call Counter

    10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 10.10.3 Functions • To check the number of misfeeds that have occurred at different locations in the machine. • To clear the count of each counter. • To check the number of paper misfeeds that have occurred Setting/ •...

  • Page 390: Service Total

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 10. Service Mode 10.10.7 Service Total A. Total Functions • To display the count value for the service total counter. • Use to check the total No. of printed pages including the ones printed by the Service Mode.

  • Page 391: List Output

    10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 10.11 List Output 10.11.1 Machine Management List Functions • To produce an output of a list of setting values, adjustment values, Total Counter val- ues, and others. • At the end of setup or when a malfunction occurs. Setting/ •...

  • Page 392: State Confirmation

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 10. Service Mode 10.12 State Confirmation 10.12.1 Sensor Check Functions • To display the states of the input ports of sensors and switches when the machine remains stationary. • Used for troubleshooting when a malfunction or a misfeed occurs. Setting/ •...
  • Page 393 10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 B. Sensor Check Screens • These are only typical screens which may be different from what are shown on each indi- vidual machine. 4038F3E511DA...
  • Page 394 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 10. Service Mode C. Sensor Check List (1) Sensors 1 (Main Unit, PC-103, PC-203) Operation Characteristics/ Panel Display Symbol Panel Display Part/Signal Name PC12 Tray 1 Device Tray 1 Set Sensor In position Out of Detection position PC10...
  • Page 395 10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 Operation Characteristics/ Panel Display Symbol Panel Display Part/Signal Name Paper Registration Registration Roller Sensor Paper Paper not Pas- Roller present present sage Exit Exit Sensor Paper Paper not present present OHP Detect OHP Sensor Not OHP Fusing Loop...
  • Page 396 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 10. Service Mode D. Sensors 2 (Main Unit, PC-403) Operation Characteristics/ Panel Display Symbol Panel Display Part/Signal Name PC4-LCT Lift-Up Upper Lift-Up Upper Sensor At raised Not at raised position position PC13-LCT Lift-Up Lower Lift-Up Lower Sensor At lower limit Not at lower limit...
  • Page 397 10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 E. Sensors 3 • When the finisher FS-501 is mounted. Operation Characteristics/ Panel Display Symbol Panel Display Part/Signal Name PC1-FN Multi Exit (Non-sort1) 1st Tray Exit Sensor Paper Paper not Staple present present Finisher...
  • Page 398 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 10. Service Mode • When the finisher FS-514 is mounted. Operation characteristics/ Panel display Symbol Panel display Part/signal name Carrying Paper Paper Paper not Entrance sensor Passage present present Middle Paper Paper Paper not Transport sensor Passage present...
  • Page 399 10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 F. Sensors 4 • When the finisher FS-603 is mounted. Operation Characteristics/ Panel Display Symbol Panel Display Part/Signal Name PI1-FN Saddle Entrance Entrance Sensor Paper Paper not present Stitch present Fin- PI2-FN Paddle Home Paddle Home Position Sensor...
  • Page 400 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 10. Service Mode Operation Characteristics/ Panel Display Symbol Panel Display Part/Signal Name MS1-FN Saddle Front Door SW Front Door Open Sensor Open Stitch — Remain in — Paper horiz. Fin- Reverse Section side isher MS2-FN Joint SW Joint Open Sensor...
  • Page 401 10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 • When the finisher SD-503/MT-501 is mounted. Operation characteris- tics/Panel display Symbol Panel display Part/Signal name Paper Paper not PC20-SK Saddle exit Saddle exit sensor present present Paper Paper not PC22-SK Folding R home Crease roller home position sensor present...
  • Page 402 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 10. Service Mode G. Sensors 5 (Main Unit) Operation Characteristics/ Panel Display Symbol Panel Display Part/Signal Name PC201 Scanner Home Sensor Scanner Home Sensor At home Out of home S201 Org. Original Cover Size Reset Switch Lowered Raised Detecting...

  • Page 403: Table Number

    10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 10.12.2 Table Number Functions • To display the Vg/Vdc output values calculated for the image density of the test pat- tern (amount of toner sticking) produced on the Transfer Belt during an AIDC detec- tion sequence.

  • Page 404: Ccd Check

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 10. Service Mode 10.12.6 CCD Check Functions • To display the D/A value of CCD clamp/gain for R, G, and B. • Used for troubleshooting for the CCD Sensor. Setting/ • Use the following guidelines on the correct range of values. Procedure CLAMP: The difference between the max.
  • Page 405 10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 C. Memory Bus Check Functions • To check to see if image data is correctly transferred from scanner to memory, and from memory to printer. • If the copy image is faulty. Adjustment 1.
  • Page 406 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 10. Service Mode F. HDD R/W Check Functions • To check to see if the hard disk is connected properly, and if read/write operation of the hard disk is correctly performed. • When the hard disk is mounted. Adjustment 1.

  • Page 407: Memory/Hdd State

    10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 H. HDD Version Down Functions • To upgrade administration data (Document management information, Address infor- mation, etc.) other than image data in HDD. • To change firmware from phase 2.5 or after to phase 2.02. * “MFP Controller”...

  • Page 408: Iu Lot No

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 10. Service Mode 10.12.10 IU Lot No. Functions • To display the 10-digit lot number for each of C, M, Y, and K IUs. • The lot number data is stored in EEPROM of each IU. •...
  • Page 409 10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 10.13 Test Mode • To check the image on the printer side by letting the machine produce various types of test pattern. It also tests the printing operation in running mode, as well as the Fax trans- mission.

  • Page 410: Halftone Pattern

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 10. Service Mode 10.13.3 Halftone Pattern Functions • To produce a solid halftone pattern. • Used for checking uneven density and pitch noise. Pattern SINGLE HYPER Gradation Cyan Density: 255 4036fs3043c0 Setting/ • # of Print (“1” to 999) Procedure •...

  • Page 411: Solid Pattern

    10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 10.13.5 Solid Pattern Functions • To produce each of the C, M, Y, and K solid patterns. • Used for checking reproducibility of image density. Pattern SINGLE HYPER Gradation Density: 255 4036fs3045c0 Setting/ •...
  • Page 412 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 10. Service Mode 10.13.7 8 Color Solid Pattern Functions • To produce an 8-color solid pattern. • Used for checking color reproducibility and uneven density of each color. Pattern SINGLE HYPER Gradation Density: 255 4036fs3047c0 Setting/ •...

  • Page 413: Internet Isw Set

    10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 10.17 Internet ISW • By using this setting, the Firmware stored in the Server can be downloaded over internet for upgrading. • For details for upgrading the Firmware, refer to “Firmware upgrade” in the Maintenance section.

  • Page 414: Ftp Setting

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 10. Service Mode D. Proxy Authentication Functions • To set the Login name or Password when Authentication is necessary for accessing the Proxy Server. • To use when Authentication is necessary for accessing the Proxy Server. Setting/ <Authentication>...

  • Page 415: Forwarding Access Setting

    10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 D. Connection Setting Functions • To set the Port No. and the time for Timeout when accessing the FTP Server, and also to set whether or not to enable PASV Mode. •...
  • Page 416 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 10. Service Mode 10.17.5 Download Functions • Access the Program Server according to the Internet ISW setting, and download the Firmware. • To use when updating the Firmware via network. Setting/ 1. Select [Download]. Procedure 2.

  • Page 417: Enhanced Security

    11. Enhanced Security Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 11. Enhanced Security 11.1 Enhanced Security Function Setting Procedure 11.1.1 Procedure 1. Call the Service Mode to the screen. 2. Press the following keys in this order. → → Stop Clear 3.

  • Page 418: Settings In The Enhanced Security

    [Administrator Setting] → [Security Setting] • NEVER forget the CE password. When forgetting the CE password, call responsible person of KONICA MINOLTA. 11.3.2 Administrator Password Functions •...

  • Page 419: Administrator Feature Level

    11. Enhanced Security Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 11.3.3 Administrator Feature Level Functions • To set which Modes to be allowed for the Administrator to use in Service Mode. • Use when allowing the Administrator to use some Modes in Service Mode. •...

  • Page 420: Nvram Data Backup

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 11. Enhanced Security 11.3.6 NVRAM Data Backup Functions • To backup nonvolatile data (data stored in NVRAM) in the Copier to the Flash mem- ory. • To backup current data in order to prevent data in NVRAM from being erased unex- pectedly.

  • Page 421: Billing Setting

    12. Billing Setting Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 12. Billing Setting 12.1 Billing Setting Function Setting Procedure 12.1.1 Procedure 1. Call the Service Mode to the screen. 2. Press the following keys in this order. → Stop 3. Billing Setting menu will appear. 4037F3E612DA 12.1.2 Exiting...

  • Page 422: Settings In The Billing Setting

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 12. Billing Setting 12.3 Settings in the Billing Setting 12.3.1 Counter Setting Functions • To set the counting method for the Total Counter and Size Counter. • To set the size regarded as the Large size (2 counts.) •...
  • Page 423 12. Billing Setting Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 Setting/ Long Length Paper Counter Mode Procedure • When printing on the long paper (457.3 mm or over), the counting value will be the total of the value set by the total counter mode and the value by this setting. •...
  • Page 424 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 12. Billing Setting C. Key Counter Only Functions • To set whether or not the Key Counter is installed. • Set when the Key Counter is mounted. • Select [Color Mode] and [Message] when the Key Counter is mounted. ✽...
  • Page 425 12. Billing Setting Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 E. Management Device 2 Functions • To set whether or not the Management Device 2 is installed. • Set when the Management Device 2 is mounted. ✽ Management Setting Setting/ Procedure •...
  • Page 426 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 12. Billing Setting G. Vendor 2 Functions • To set whether or not the Vendor 2 is installed. • Set when the Vendor 2 is mounted. NOTE • When using the Vendor along with the Key Counter, inserting the Key Counter will set it to the “Key Counter Mode”...
  • Page 427 12. Billing Setting Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 Manage- Manage- Key Counter Authentication Setting Item Vendor 1 Vendor 2 Key Counter ment ment IF Vendor Device Device 1 Device 2 Administrator    Prohibit Security Level Weekly Timer ...
  • Page 428 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 12. Billing Setting 12.3.3 Coverage Rate Clear Functions • To clear the coverage rate • Use to clear the coverage rate Setting/ • The default setting is Unset. Procedure “Unset” • Touching [END] key will clear the coverage rate.

  • Page 429: Procedure For Resetting

    13. Procedure for Resetting Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 13. Procedure for Resetting 13.1 Trouble resetting Functions • If the all troubles occur and the status would not be cleared by turning Main Power Switch OFF and ON again, or opening and closing the front door, clear the status of the machine.
  • Page 430 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 14. Mechanical adjustment 14. Mechanical adjustment 14.1 Mechanical adjustment of the scanner section 14.1.1 Adjustment of the Scanner Motor Belt This adjustment must be made in the following case: • The Scanner Motor Assy has been removed. •...
  • Page 431 14. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 4. Remove 16 screws [5], and remove the Reinforcement frame [6]. 4038F2C130DA 5. Loosen the three screws that secure the Scanner Motor mounting bracket [7]. 4038F2C568DA 6. With the Scanner drive gear set [11] [10] screw [8] located on the right-hand...
  • Page 432 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 14. Mechanical adjustment 14.1.2 Focus Positioning of the Scanner and Mirrors Unit This adjustment must be made in the following case: • The Scanner Drive Cables have been rewound 1. Remove two Screws [1] and Lens cover [2].

  • Page 433: Scanner Position Adjustment

    14. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 14.2 Scanner Position Adjustment This adjustment must be made in the following case: • The Scanner Drive Cables have been rewound. • Focus Positioning of the Scanner and Mirrors Unit must be completed. 1.

  • Page 434: Mechanical Adjustment Of The Bypass Tray Section

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 14. Mechanical adjustment 14.3 Mechanical adjustment of the bypass tray section 14.3.1 Adjustment of the Bypass Paper Size Unit This adjustment must be made in the following case: • The Bypass Paper Size Unit has been removed. 1.
  • Page 435 14. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 3. When the Bypass Paper Size Unit base is mounted, align the lever position of the Bypass Paper Size Unit with the tab at the center in a straight line. 4038F3C512DA 4.

  • Page 436: Ph Unit Mechanical Adjustment

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 14. Mechanical adjustment 14.4 PH Unit Mechanical Adjustment 14.4.1 Skew Adjustment This adjustment must be made in the following case: • When PH Unit is replaced. 1. Turn ON the main power switch. 2. Select [Service Mode] → [Test Mode] →...
  • Page 437 14. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 • If either value is out of the specifica- tion, follow the procedures shown below to adjust it to satisfy the specifi- cation. • If the value of all color, C, M, Y satisfy the specification, proceed to step 10.
  • Page 438 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 14. Mechanical adjustment Blank Page...
  • Page 439 14. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006...
  • Page 440 Troubleshooting 15. Jam Display 15.1 Misfeed Display • When a paper misfeed occurs, the misfeed message, misfeed location, and paper loca- tion are displayed on the Control Panel of the machine. 15.1.1 bizhub C250 [12] [10] [10] [11] [11] [11]...
  • Page 441 15. Jam Display Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 Display Code *1 Misfeed Location Misfeed Processing Location Action 1101 Tray 1 feed section Right Door P.404 3001 2nd Image Transfer section Right Door P.405 1201 Tray 2 feed section Tray 2 Right Door P.406 2001 Tray 2 vertical transport section...

  • Page 442: Bizhub C

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 15. Jam Display 15.1.2 bizhub C252 [12] [11] [10] 4038F4C523DA Display Code *1 Misfeed Location Misfeed Processing Location Action 1101 Tray 1 feed section Right Door P.404 3001 2nd Image Transfer section Right Door P.405 1201 Tray 2 feed section...
  • Page 443 *4: See the optional SD-503 Service Manual. *5: See the optional DF-601 Service Manual. NOTE • Misfeed displays of the finisher FS-501/FS-603 are the same as bizhub C250. 15.1.3 Misfeed Display Resetting Procedure • Open the corresponding door, clear the sheet of paper misfeed, and close the door.
  • Page 444 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 15. Jam Display 15.2 Sensor layout • System Mounted with PC-203. [10] 4038F4C510DA Exit Sensor Tray 2 Paper Take-Up Sensor PC9-PC Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 PC1 DU Tray 3 Vertical Transport Sensor PC117-PC Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 PC2 DU Tray 3 Take-up Sensor PC116-PC...
  • Page 445 15. Jam Display Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 • System Mounted with PC-403. 4038F4C511DA Exit Sensor Tray 2 Vertical Transport Sensor PC8-PC Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 PC1 DU Tray 2 Paper Take-Up Sensor PC9-PC Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 PC2 DU Vertical Transport Sensor PC2-LCT [4]*1 Registration Roller Sensor...
  • Page 446 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 15. Jam Display 15.3 Solution 15.3.1 Initial Check Items • When a paper misfeed occurs, first make checks of the following initial check items Check Item Action Does paper meet product specifications? Change paper. Change paper.

  • Page 447: Misfeed At Tray 1 Feed Section

    15. Jam Display Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 15.3.2 Misfeed at Tray 1 feed section A. Detection Timing Type Description Detection of The leading edge of the paper does not block the Registration Roller Sensor misfeed at Tray 1 (PC1) even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Tray 1 Paper Feed feed section Clutch (CL2) has been energized.

  • Page 448: Misfeed At 2Nd Image Transfer Section

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 15. Jam Display 15.3.3 Misfeed at 2nd Image Transfer section A. Detection Timing Type Description Detection of The leading edge of the paper does not block the Exit Sensor (PC2) even after the misfeed at 2nd lapse of a given period of time after the Registration Roller Clutch (CL1) has been Image Transfer energized.

  • Page 449: Misfeed At Tray 2 Feed, Tray 2 Vertical Transport Section

    15. Jam Display Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 15.3.4 Misfeed at Tray 2 feed, Tray 2 vertical transport section A. Detection Timing Type Description Detection of The leading edge of the paper does not block the Tray 2 Vertical Transport Sensor misfeed at Tray 2 (PC8-PC) even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Tray 2 Paper feed section...

  • Page 450: Misfeed At Manual Bypass Feed Section

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 15. Jam Display 15.3.5 Misfeed at Manual Bypass feed section A. Detection Timing Type Description Detection of The leading edge of the paper does not block the Registration Roller Sensor misfeed at Manual (PC1) even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Bypass Paper Feed Bypass feed Clutch (CL5) has been energized.

  • Page 451: Misfeed At Lct Feed And Lct Vertical Transport Section (Pc)

    15. Jam Display Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 15.3.6 Misfeed at LCT feed and LCT vertical transport section (PC-403) A. Detection Timing Type Description Detection of The leading edge of the paper does not block the Paper Take-up Sensor (PC1- misfeed at LCT LCT) or Vertical Transport Sensor (PC2-LCT) even after the lapse of a given feed section...

  • Page 452: Misfeed At Tray 3 Feed And Tray 3 Vertical Transport Section (Pc-103/Pc)

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 15. Jam Display 15.3.7 Misfeed at Tray 3 Feed and Tray 3 vertical transport section (PC-103/PC203) A. Detection Timing Type Description Detection of The leading edge of the paper does not block the Tray 3 Vertical Transport Sensor misfeed at Tray 3 (PC117-PC) even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Tray3 Take-up feed or Vertical...

  • Page 453: Misfeed At Tray 4 Feed And Tray 4 Vertical Transport Section (Pc)

    15. Jam Display Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 15.3.8 Misfeed at Tray 4 Feed and Tray 4 vertical transport section (PC203) A. Detection Timing Type Description Detection of The leading edge of the paper does not block the Tray 4 Vertical Transport Sensor misfeed at Tray 4 (PC126-PC) even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Tray4 Take-up feed or Vertical...

  • Page 454: Misfeed At Duplex Transport Section (Ad)

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 15. Jam Display 15.3.9 Misfeed at Duplex transport section (AD-503) A. Detection Timing Type Description Detection of The Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 (PC2 DU) is not blocked even after the lapse misfeed at Duplex of a given period of time after the paper has blocked the Duplex Unit Transport Transport section Sensor 1 (PC1 DU).

  • Page 455: Misfeed At Duplex Unit Pre-Registration Section (Ad)

    15. Jam Display Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 15.3.10 Misfeed at Duplex Unit pre-registration section (AD-503) A. Detection Timing Type Description Detection of The Registration Roller Sensor (PC1) is not blocked even after the lapse of a misfeed at Duplex given period of time after a Duplex paper feed sequence has been started.

  • Page 456: Misfeed At Fusing/Exit Section

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 15. Jam Display 15.3.11 Misfeed at Fusing/Exit section A. Detection Timing Type Description Detection of PC2 is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the paper misfeed at Fusing/ has blocked the Exit Sensor (PC2).
  • Page 457 16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 16. Malfunction code 16.1 Alert code • The machine’s CPU performs a self-diagnostics function that, on detecting a malfunction, gives the corresponding malfunction code and maintenance call mark on the Control Panel.

  • Page 458: Alert List

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 16. Malfunction code 16.1.1 Alert list • If an image stabilization or Scanner fault occurs, the corresponding warning code appears. Code Item Description CCD clamp gain adjustment failure • It is detected that the CCD clamp gain adjustment value is faulty.

  • Page 459: S-1: Ccd Clamp/Gain Adjustment Failure

    16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 16.2 Solution 16.2.1 S-1: CCD clamp/gain adjustment failure Relevant Electrical Parts Scanner Assy CCD Sensor Board (PWB-A) Image Processing Board (PWB-C) Step Action Correct the harness connection between PWB-A and PWB-C if faulty. Check for possible extraneous light and correct as necessary.

  • Page 460: P-6: Cyan Imaging Unit Failure

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 16. Malfunction code 16.2.4 P-6: Cyan Imaging Unit failure 16.2.5 P-7: Magenta Imaging Unit failure 16.2.6 P-8: Yellow Imaging Unit failure 16.2.7 P-9: Black Imaging Unit failure Relevant Electrical Parts Imaging Unit /C Image Transfer Belt Unit Imaging Unit /M High Voltage Unit (HV1) Imaging Unit /Y...
  • Page 461 16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 16.2.10 P-26: 1st image transfer ATVC (Black) failure 16.2.11 P-27: 2nd image transfer ATVC failure 16.2.12 P-29: 1st image transfer ATVC (Color) failure Relevant Electrical Parts High Voltage Unit (HV1) Image Transfer Belt Unit Mechanical Control Board (PWB-M) Step Action...
  • Page 462 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 16. Malfunction code 16.2.14 P-31: Black PC Drum Sensor malfunction Relevant Electrical Parts Black PC Drive Main Sensor (PC15) Transport Drive Assy Black PC Drive Sub Sensor (PC16) Mechanical Control Board (PWB-M) Step Action Perform the faulty sensor check procedure.
  • Page 463 16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 16.3 Trouble code • The machine’s CPU performs a self-diagnostics function that, on detecting a malfunction, gives the corresponding malfunction code and maintenance call mark on the Touch Panel. 4038F4E513DA 16.3.1 Trouble code list * For the details of the malfunction codes of the options, see the Service Manual for the cor- responding option.
  • Page 464 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 16. Malfunction code Code Item Description Rank C0301 Suction Fan Motor’s failure to • The Fan Lock signal remains HIGH for a predeter- turn mined continuous period of time while the Motor remains stationary. C1180 Finishing option transport See FS-501 or FS-603 Service Manual.
  • Page 465 16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 Code Item Description Rank C11C3 Finishing option Punch Side See FS-501 or FS-603 Service Manual. Registration Motor malfunction C11C5 Finishing option Punch Sensor malfunction C11D0 Crease motor drive failure See SD-503 Service Manual. C1301 Finishing option cooling fan See FS-514 Service Manual.
  • Page 466 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 16. Malfunction code Code Item Description Rank C2552 Abnormally high toner density • TC ratio in the developing machine, which is detected Cyan TCR Sensor determined by Toner replenishing amount control mechanism, is 12 % or more for a given number of times consecutively.
  • Page 467 16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 Code Item Description Rank C2A01 Cyan Toner Cartridge EEPROM • The re-written data, which has been read out, access error checked and founded as error, is read out again and found as error. C2A02 Magenta Toner Cartridge •...
  • Page 468 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 16. Malfunction code Code Item Description Rank C3851 Abnormal Low Temp. (Heater) • The temperature of the Heating Roller Ther- mistor/1 (TH1) is lower than a given level of degree for 1 second or more uninterruptedly dur- ing Ready mode, Low Power mode or printing.
  • Page 469 16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 Code Item Description Rank C4782 Compressor 2 command buffer • The MFP Control Board (PWB-MFP) is faulty. stop failure C4783 Compressor 3 command buffer stop failure C5102 Main Motor’s failure to turn •...
  • Page 470 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 16. Malfunction code Code Item Description Rank C9401 Exposure Lamp’s failure to turn • The output from the CCD Sensor is a predeter- mined value or less during CCD Sensor gain adjustment. C9402 Exposure Lamp turning ON at •...
  • Page 471 16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 Code Item Description Rank CB127 Timeout Error due to Nonre- See FK-502 Service Manual. sponse from CC during Suspen- sion Process CB128 Timeout Error due to Nonre- sponse from LINE during Sus- pension Process CB129 Timeout Error due to Nonre- sponse from File System/File...
  • Page 472 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 16. Malfunction code Code Item Description Rank CB154 Line Control: Internal Que Table See FK-502 Service Manual. Control Error (create/enque/ deque) CB160 1 Destination Control: Instance Generation Error CB161 1 Destination Control: Timeout Error CB162 1 Destination Control: Interface Error CB163 1 Destination Control: Message...
  • Page 473 16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 Code Item Description Rank CB188 Page Control: BandBuf Control See FK-502 Service Manual. Error (newInstance/get/free) CC001 Vendor connection failure • It is detected that communications with the ven- dor are interrupted for a given period of time or more with “Installed”...
  • Page 474 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 16. Malfunction code Code Item Description Rank CD203 Memory capacity discrepancy 2 • File memory capacity on the MFP Control Board (PWB-MFP) is not enough. CD211 PCI-SDRAM DMA operation • Hardware related to the transfer of memory image failure of the MFP Control Board (PWB-MFP) fails to respond.
  • Page 475 16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 • The machine displays an abort code (CFXXX) on the Control Panel as it becomes unable to process tasks properly through its software control. • When the system program is aborted, check the electrical component, unit, option, and connection relating to the specific type of the abort condition.
  • Page 476 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 16. Malfunction code Relevant Electrical Code Item Components, Units, and Rank Options CF131 Print TIME OUT Image transfer mal- • MFP Control Board functions (PWB-MFP) CF201 startIRReadAnd An exceptional Compress()Sequence instance occurred due to the unex- CF202 startWorkSave()Sequence pected Parameter in Abnormal...
  • Page 477 16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 Relevant Electrical Code Item Components, Units, and Rank Options CF550 Parity error + Overrun error • MFP Control Board (PWB-MFP) CF560 Overrun error + Framing error CF570 Parity error + Overrun error + Framing error CF580 Frame distortion of ADF Communication Error...
  • Page 478 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 16. Malfunction code Relevant Electrical Code Item Components, Units, and Rank Options CF806 SIO Sending Port...IRC • MFP Control Board (PWB-MFP) CF812 SIO Sending Port...Fiery CF815 SIO Sending Port...PIC/PIC Terminal CF8ED SIO Sending Port...EPNet CF902 SIO Receiving Port...ENG •...
  • Page 479 16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 Relevant Electrical Code Item Components, Units, and Rank Options CFA28 BTC extension start An exceptional • MFP Control Board instance occurred (PWB-MFP) CFA29 JPEG compression start due to the unex- CFA30 JPEG extension start pected Parameter in CFA31 Software resolution conversion the System F/W.
  • Page 480 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 16. Malfunction code Relevant Electrical Code Item Components, Units, and Rank Options CFB55 DMA_D 0 error interruption Error concerning • MFP Control Board (PWB- Data transmission MFP)/Engine CFB56 DMA_D 1 error interruption Bus or hardware (Engine output sys- tem) CFB57 DMA_D 2 error interruption...
  • Page 481 16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 Relevant Electrical Code Item Components, Units, and Rank Options CFB7A Master read data parity error PCI Bus connection • MFP Control Board Device error (PWB-MFP) CFB7B Master write data parity error CFB7C System error CFB7D Slave read data parity error CFB7E Slave write data parity error...
  • Page 482 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 16. Malfunction code Relevant Electrical Code Item Components, Units, and Rank Options CFBBA JpegASIC error interruption • MFP Control Board (PWB- Master read data parity error occurred. MFP)/ JPEG Board CFBBB JpegASIC error interruption Master write data parity error occurred.
  • Page 483 16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 Relevant Electrical Code Item Components, Units, and Rank Options CFD0C ASIC10 Timeout Number of DMA under operation and • MFP Control Board transfer completion line=0: DMA_H1 (PWB-MFP) CFD0D ASIC10 Timeout Number of DMA under operation and transfer completion line=0: DMA_H2 CFD0E ASIC10 Timeout Number of DMA under operation and transfer completion line=0: DMA-I...
  • Page 484 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 16. Malfunction code Relevant Electrical Code Item Components, Units, and Rank Options CFE0E ASIC10 Timeout Number of DMA under operation and • MFP Control Board transfer completion line≠0: DMA-I (PWB-MFP) CFE0F ASIC10 Timeout Number of DMA under operation and •...

  • Page 485: How To Reset

    16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 Relevant Electrical Code Item Components, Units, and Rank Options CFF10 ASIC10 Timeout Waiting state of DMA band prepara- • MFP Control Board tion register setting:DMA PCI Bridge (PWB-MFP) CFF11 ASIC10 Timeout Waiting state of DMA band prepara- tion register setting:DMA 19 ASIC1 CFF12 ASIC10 Timeout Waiting state of DMA band prepara- tion register setting:DMA JPEG...

  • Page 486: C0204: Tray 2 Elevator Failure

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 16. Malfunction code 16.5 Solution 16.5.1 C0204: Tray 2 Elevator failure Relevant Electrical Parts Tray 2 Lift-Up Sensor (PC7-PC) Tray 2 Control Board (PWB-Z-PC) Tray 2 Lift-Up Motor (M3-PC) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control Signal cal Component) Check the M3-PC connector for proper...

  • Page 487: C2151: 2Nd Image Transfer Roller Separation

    16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 16.5.4 C2151: 2nd Image Transfer Roller Separation Relevant Electrical Parts Mechanical Control Board (PWB-M) Right Door Assy WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control Signal cal Component) Check the connector of motor for proper —...

  • Page 488: C2254: Color Pc Drum Motor's Turning At Abnormal Timing

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 16. Malfunction code 16.5.7 C2254: Color PC Drum Motor’s turning at abnormal timing Relevant Electrical Parts Color PC Drum Motor (M2) Mechanical Control Board (PWB-M) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control Signal cal Component) PWB-M CNDM3-5 (REM) M2 operation check C-21...
  • Page 489 16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 16.5.10 C2451: Transfer Cleaner Unit New Article Release Relevant Electrical Parts Mechanical Control Board (PWB-M) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control Signal cal Component) Reinstall Unit — — Change PWB-M —...
  • Page 490 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 16. Malfunction code 16.5.14 C2552: Abnormally high toner density detected Cyan TCR Sensor 16.5.15 C2554: Abnormally high toner density detected Magenta TCR Sensor 16.5.16 C2556: Abnormally high toner density detected Yellow TCR Sensor Relevant Electrical Parts Imaging Unit /C Mechanical Control Board (PWB-M) Imaging Unit /M...

  • Page 491: C2558: Abnormally High Toner Density Detected Black Tcr Sensor

    16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 16.5.18 C2558: Abnormally high toner density detected Black TCR Sensor Relevant Electrical Parts Imaging Unit /K Mechanical Control Board (PWB-M) MFP Control Board (PWB-MFP) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control Signal cal Component) Correct the TCR connection on the —...
  • Page 492 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 16. Malfunction code 16.5.22 C255C: Black TCR Sensor adjustment failure Relevant Electrical Parts Imaging Unit /K Mechanical Control Board (PWB-M) Toner Supply Motor C/K (M7) MFP Control Board (PWB-MFP) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control Signal cal Component) Clean or correct each contact of the...
  • Page 493 16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 16.5.27 C2A01: Cyan Toner Cartridge EEPROM access error 16.5.28 C2A02: Yellow Toner Cartridge EEPROM access error 16.5.29 C2A03: Magenta Toner Cartridge EEPROM access error 16.5.30 C2A04: Black Toner Cartridge EEPROM access error Relevant Electrical Parts Toner Cartridge /C Mechanical Control Board (PWB-M)
  • Page 494 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 16. Malfunction code 16.5.32 C3302: Fusing Cooling Fan Motor /2’s failure to turn Relevant Electrical Parts Fusing Cooling Fan Motor/2 (M13) Mechanical Control Board (PWB-M) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control Signal cal Component) Check the connector of motor for proper —...

  • Page 495: C3461: Fusing Unit New Article Release

    16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 16.5.39 C3461: Fusing Unit New Article Release Relevant Electrical Parts Fusing Unit Mechanical Control Board (PWB-M) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control Signal cal Component) Check the Fusing Unit for correct installa- —...
  • Page 496 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 16. Malfunction code 16.5.42 C4151: Polygon Motor/C failure to turn 16.5.43 C4152: Polygon Motor/M failure to turn 16.5.44 C4153: Polygon Motor/Y failure to turn 16.5.45 C4154: Polygon Motor/K failure to turn Relevant Electrical Parts PH Unit PH Interface Board (PWB-D) Mechanical Control Board (PWB-M)
  • Page 497 16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 16.5.50 C4705: Image Output Time Out Relevant Electrical Parts MFP Control Board (PWB-MFP) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control Signal cal Component) Select [Service Mode] → [State Confirma- tion] → [Memory/HDD Adj.] → [Memory —...

  • Page 498: C5102: Main Motor's Failure To Turn

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 16. Malfunction code 16.5.61 C5102: Main Motor’s failure to turn Relevant Electrical Parts Main Motor (M1) Mechanical Control Board (PWB-M) DC Power Supply (PU1) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control Signal cal Component) Check the M1 connector for proper connec- —...

  • Page 499: C5354: Ozone Ventilation Fan Motor's Failure To Turn

    16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 16.5.64 C5353: Cooling Fan Motor 2’s failure to turn Relevant Electrical Parts Cooling Fan Motor/2 (M22) Mechanical Control Board (PWB-M) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control Signal cal Component) Check the connector of motor for proper —...

  • Page 500: C5358: Power Supply Cooling Fan Motor/2'S Failure To Turn

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 16. Malfunction code 16.5.67 C5358: Power Supply Cooling Fan Motor/2’s failure to turn Relevant Electrical Parts Power Supply Cooling Fan Motor/2 (M9) Mechanical Control Board (PWB-M) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control Signal cal Component) Check the connector of motor for proper —...

  • Page 501: C6301: Scanner Cooling Fan Motor's Failure To Turn

    16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 16.5.70 C6301: Scanner Cooling Fan Motor’s failure to turn Relevant Electrical Parts Scanner Cooling Fan Motor (M202) Image Processing Board (PWB-C) Mechanical Control Board (PWB-M) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control Signal cal Component) Check the connector of motor for proper...
  • Page 502 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 16. Malfunction code 16.5.72 C6751: CCD clamp/gain adjustment failure Relevant Electrical Parts Scanner Assy CCD Sensor Board (PWB-A) Image Processing Board (PWB-C) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control Signal cal Component) Correct the harness connection between —...
  • Page 503 16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 16.5.75 CA051: Standard Controller configuration failure 16.5.76 CA052:Controller hardware error 16.5.77 CA053: Controller start failure Relevant Electrical Parts MFP Control Board (PWB-MFP) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control Signal cal Component) Check to see if the following setting has been correctly made: [Service Mode] →...
  • Page 504 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 16. Malfunction code 16.5.79 CC151: ROM contents error upon startup (MSC) 16.5.80 CC152: ROM contents error upon startup (Scanner) 16.5.81 CC153: ROM contents error upon startup (PRT) 16.5.82 CC154: ROM contents error upon startup (PH) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action...
  • Page 505 16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 16.5.86 CD004: Hard disk access error 16.5.87 CD005: Hard Disk Error 1 16.5.88 CD006: Hard Disk Error 2 16.5.89 CD007: Hard Disk Error 3 16.5.90 CD008: Hard Disk Error 4 16.5.91 CD009: Hard Disk Error 5 16.5.92 CD00A: Hard Disk Error 6...
  • Page 506 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 16. Malfunction code 16.5.100 CD011: Hard disk specifications error Relevant Electrical Parts Hard Disk WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control Signal cal Component) Check the hard disk specifications. — — Change the hard disk. —...
  • Page 507 16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 16.5.106 CD231: No Fax memory at FAX board mounting Relevant Electrical Parts MFP Control Board (PWB-MFP) FAX Board PCI Expansion Board FAX Memory WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control Signal cal Component) Check to see if the FAX Memory is installed —...

  • Page 508: Cd251: No Jpeg Board Mounting At Jpeg Board Mount Setting

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 16. Malfunction code 16.5.109 CD251: No JPEG board mounting at JPEG board mount setting Relevant Electrical Parts MFP Control Board (PWB-MFP) JPEG Board (SA-501) PCI Expansion Board WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control Signal cal Component) Check the JPEG Board connector for proper connection and correct as neces-...
  • Page 509 16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 16.5.110 CD3##: NVRAM Data error • When the data stored due to the NVRAM trouble is lost, backup data can be used for res- toration. • Trouble code [C-D370] will be displayed when multiple errors (over 5) of NVRAM data are detected, which can be restored with one restoration command.
  • Page 510 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 16. Malfunction code 16.5.111 CE001: Abnormal message queue 16.5.112 CE003: Task error 16.5.113 CE004: Event error 16.5.114 CE005: Memory access error 16.5.115 CE006: Header access error 16.5.116 CE007: DIMM initialize error Relevant Electrical Parts MFP Control Board (PWB-MFP) WIRING DIAGRAM Step...

  • Page 511: Ceee1: Msc Undefined Malfunction Occurring

    16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 16.5.118 CEEE1: MSC undefined malfunction occurring Relevant Electrical Parts MFP Control Board (PWB-MFP) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control Signal cal Component) Check the connectors on PWB-MFP for proper connection and correct as neces- —...

  • Page 512: Power Supply Trouble

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 17. Power supply trouble 17. Power supply trouble 17.1 Machine is not energized at all (PU1 operation check) Relevant Electrical Parts Main Power Switch (S1) DC Power Supply (PU1) Mechanical Control Board (PWB-M) WIRING Step Check Item DIAGRAM...

  • Page 513: Fusing Heaters Do Not Operate

    17. Power supply trouble Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 17.3 Fusing heaters do not operate Relevant Electrical Parts Primary Interlock Switch (S2) DC Power Supply (PU1) Fusing Unit WIRING Step Check Item DIAGRAM Result Action (Location) Is the power source voltage applied across Check wiring from power PJ2PU1-1 to 3 on PU1? outlet to S2 to PJ2PU1.

  • Page 514: Power Is Not Supplied To Automatic Duplex Unit

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 17. Power supply trouble 17.4.3 Power is not supplied to automatic duplex unit WIRING Step Check Item DIAGRAM Result Action (Location) Is DC24 V being output from CN19-2 on Malfunction in Duplex. K-22 Duplex? Is DC24 V being output from CNDUP-2 on Check wiring from PWB-M J-22...

  • Page 515: Image Quality Problem

    18. Image quality problem Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 18. Image quality problem 18.1 How to read element date • As part of troubleshooting procedures, the numeric values set for “State Confirmation” available from “Service Mode” can be used to isolate the cause of the image problem. 4038F4E514DA 18.1.1 Table Number...
  • Page 516 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 18. Image quality problem 18.1.2 Level History 1 4038F4E515DA TCR-C • Shows the T/C ratio (in 0.01 % increments). TCR-M • Standard value: 8 ± 2 % TCR-Y • Relevant Components: PH Unit, TCR Sensor K TCR-K IDC1 •...
  • Page 517 18. Image quality problem Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 18.1.3 Level History 2 4038F4E516DA IDC Sensor Adjust 1 • Shows the IDC intensity adjustment value. IDC Sensor Adjust 2 • It should normally be around 40 and can range from 0 to 255. •...

  • Page 518: How To Identify Problematic Part

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 18. Image quality problem 18.2 How to identify problematic part • This chapter is divided into two parts: “Initial Check Items” and “Troubleshooting Proce- dure by a Particular Image Quality Problem.” • When an image quality problem occurs, first go through the “Initial Check Items” and, if the cause is yet to be identified, go to “Troubleshooting Procedure by a Particular Image Quality Problem.”...
  • Page 519 18. Image quality problem Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 C. Initial Check Items 3 • If the printer is responsible for the image problem, let the machine produce a test print and determine whether the image problem occurs in a specific single color or four colors 4 Colors Mono Color 4038F4C509DA...

  • Page 520: Ir System: White Lines In Sub Scan Direction, White Bands In Sub Scan

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 18. Image quality problem 18.3 Solution 18.3.1 IR System: white lines in Sub Scan Direction, white bands in Sub Scan Direction, colored lines in Sub Scan Direction, and colored bands in Sub Scan Direction A.

  • Page 521: Scanner System: White Lines In Main Scan Direction, White Bands In Main

    18. Image quality problem Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 18.3.2 Scanner System: white lines in Main Scan Direction, white bands in Main Scan Direction, colored lines in Main Scan Direction, and colored bands in Main Scan Direction A. Typical Faulty Images White lines in Main White bands in Color lines in Main...
  • Page 522 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 18. Image quality problem 18.3.3 Scanner System: color spots A. Typical Faulty Images 4036fs4029c0 B. Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action Original Original is damaged or dirty. Change original. Original Cover Original Pad is dirty. Clean.
  • Page 523 18. Image quality problem Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 18.3.4 Scanner System: fog A. Typical Faulty Images ABCD ABCD ABCD ABCD ABCD 4036fs4030c0 B. Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action Original Original is damaged or dirty. Change original. Original Cover Original Pad is dirty.

  • Page 524: Scanner System: Blurred Image, Blotchy Image

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 18. Image quality problem 18.3.5 Scanner System: blurred image, blotchy image A. Typical Faulty Images 4036fs4031c0 B. Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action Original Original does not lie flat. Change original. Original Cover Original Cover does not lie flat.
  • Page 525 18. Image quality problem Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 18.3.6 Scanner System: incorrect color image registration, sync shift (lines in main scan direction) A. Typical Faulty Images 4036fs4032c0 B. Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action Original Original does not lie flat. Change original.

  • Page 526: Scanner System: Moire

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 18. Image quality problem 18.3.7 Scanner System: moire A. Typical Faulty Images 4036fs4033c0 B. Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action Original Moire distortions recur even after Change the original mode the orientation of original has been (select one other than that changed.

  • Page 527: Scanner System: Skewed Image

    18. Image quality problem Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 18.3.8 Scanner System: skewed image A. Typical Faulty Images 4036fs4034c0 B. Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action Original Original is skew. Reposition original. Original Glass Original Glass is in positive contact Reinstall the glass.
  • Page 528 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 18. Image quality problem 18.3.9 Scanner System: distorted image A. Typical Faulty Images ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE 4036fs4035c0 B. Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action Installation Machine is installed on a level sur- Reinstall.
  • Page 529 18. Image quality problem Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 18.3.10 Scanner System: low image density, rough image A. Typical Faulty Images ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE 4036fs4036c0 B. Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action Original Original sticks to Original Glass. Reposition original.
  • Page 530 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 18. Image quality problem 18.3.11 Scanner System: defective ACS A. Typical Faulty Images Colored Area of Original ABCDE ABCDE Black-and-White Area of Original ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE 4036fs4037c0 B. Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action Auto Color Level...

  • Page 531: Scanner System: Blank Copy, Black Copy

    18. Image quality problem Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 18.3.12 Scanner System: blank copy, black copy A. Typical Faulty Images Blank copy Black copy 4036fs4038c0 4036fs4039c0 B. Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action Cable connecting Connector is connected properly Reconnect.
  • Page 532 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 18. Image quality problem 18.3.13 Scanner System: abnormal image A. Typical Faulty Images ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE Data on previous page ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE Data on current page ABCDE 4036fs4040c0 4036fs4042c0 4036fs4041c0 B. Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item...

  • Page 533: Printer Monocolor: White Lines In Sub Scan Direction, White Bands In Sub

    18. Image quality problem Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 18.3.14 Printer Monocolor: white lines in Sub Scan Direction, white bands in Sub Scan Direction, colored lines colored bands in Sub Scan Direction A. Typical Faulty Images White lines in Sub White bands in Sub Colored lines in Sub Colored bands in...

  • Page 534: Printer Monocolor: White Lines In Main Scan Direction, White Bands In Main

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 18. Image quality problem 18.3.15 Printer Monocolor: white lines in Main Scan Direction, white bands in Main Scan Direction, colored lines in Main Scan Direction, colored bands in Main Scan Direction A. Typical Faulty Images White lines in Main White bands in Main Colored lines in Main...

  • Page 535: Printer Monocolor: Uneven Density In Sub Scan Direction

    18. Image quality problem Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 18.3.16 Printer Monocolor: uneven density in sub scan direction A. Typical Faulty Images 4036fs4043c0 4036fs4044c0 4036fs4045c0 B. Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action High image density Uneven density in Sub Scan Direc- Feed 10 to 20 blank original tion occurs at a pitch of 40 mm to...

  • Page 536: Printer Monocolor: Uneven Density In Main Scan Direction

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 18. Image quality problem 18.3.17 Printer Monocolor: uneven density in main scan direction A. Typical Faulty Images 4036fs4046c0 4036fs4047c0 B. Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action Imaging Unit The surface of the PC Drum is Change Imaging Unit.

  • Page 537: Printer Monocolor: Low Image Density

    18. Image quality problem Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 18.3.18 Printer Monocolor: low image density A. Typical Faulty Images ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE 4036fs4036c0 B. Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action State Confirm → Table Check data for Vg and Vdc. Go to next step.
  • Page 538 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 18. Image quality problem Step Section Check Item Result Action Image Process “Conv. Value” falls within the speci- Go to step 19. Adjustment → Grada- fied range as checked through Gra- tion Adjust dation Adjust. (Service Mode) Max: 0 ±...

  • Page 539: Printer Monocolor: Gradation Reproduction Failure

    18. Image quality problem Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 18.3.19 Printer Monocolor: gradation reproduction failure A. Typical Faulty Images 4036fs4048c0 4036fs4049c0 B. Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action Photo/Density Original type and screen pattern Change screen pattern. are selected properly.

  • Page 540: Printer Monocolor: Foggy Background

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 18. Image quality problem 18.3.20 Printer Monocolor: foggy background A. Typical Faulty Images ABCD ABCD ABCD ABCD ABCD 4036fs4030c0 B. Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action State Confirmation → Check data for Vg and Vb. Go to next step.
  • Page 541 18. Image quality problem Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 Step Section Check Item Result Action Image Process After the Reset + Stabilizer Go to next step. Adjustment → Stabi- sequence has been completed, run lizer → Reset + Stabi- Gradation Adjust.

  • Page 542: Printer Monocolor: Void Areas, White Spots

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 18. Image quality problem 18.3.21 Printer Monocolor: void areas, white spots A. Typical Faulty Images Void areas White spots 4036fs4051c0 4036fs4050c0 B. Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action Image Check There are void areas at the front P.494 side or high density section.
  • Page 543 18. Image quality problem Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 18.3.22 Printer Monocolor: colored spots A. Typical Faulty Images Colored spots 4036fs4052c0 B. Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action Imaging Unit Developing bias contact terminal Clean contact terminal makes good connection.

  • Page 544: Printer Monocolor: Blurred Image

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 18. Image quality problem 18.3.23 Printer Monocolor: blurred image A. Typical Faulty Images Blurred image 4036fs4031c0 B. Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action PH Unit The surface of the PH Window is Clean with cleaning jig.

  • Page 545: Printer Monocolor: Blank Copy, Black Copy

    18. Image quality problem Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 18.3.24 Printer Monocolor: blank copy, black copy A. Typical Faulty Images Blank copy Black copy 4036fs4038c0 4036fs4039c0 B. Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action Image Check A blank copy occurs. Check PH Unit connector for proper connection.

  • Page 546: Printer Monocolor: Uneven Image

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 18. Image quality problem 18.3.25 Printer Monocolor: uneven image A. Typical Faulty Images 4138fs4507c0 B. Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action Toner Cartridge The Toner Cartridge of every color Re-install it. is surely installed. PH Unit The PH Unit is surely installed.

  • Page 547: Printer 4-Color: White Lines In Sub Scan Direction, White Bands In Sub Scan

    18. Image quality problem Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 18.3.26 Printer 4-Color: white lines in sub scan direction, white bands in sub scan direction, colored lines in sub scan direction, and colored bands in sub scan direction A. Typical Faulty Images White lines in Sub White bands in Sub Colored lines in Sub...
  • Page 548 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 18. Image quality problem 18.3.27 Printer 4-Color: white lines in main scan direction, white bands in main scan direction, colored lines in main scan direction, and colored bands in main scan direction A. Typical Faulty Images White lines in Main White bands in Main Colored lines in Main...

  • Page 549: Printer 4-Color: Uneven Density In Sub Scan Direction

    18. Image quality problem Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 18.3.28 Printer 4-Color: uneven density in sub scan direction A. Typical Faulty Images 4036fs4043c0 4036fs4044c0 B. Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action Image Transfer Belt Fingerprints, oil, or other foreign Clean with specified sol- Unit matter is evident on the Image...

  • Page 550: Printer 4-Color: Uneven Density In Main Scan Direction

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 18. Image quality problem 18.3.29 Printer 4-Color: uneven density in main scan direction A. Typical Faulty Images 4036fs4046c0 4036fs4047c0 B. Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action Image Transfer Belt Fingerprints, oil, or other foreign Clean with specified sol- Unit matter is evident on the Image...

  • Page 551: Printer 4-Color: Low Image Density

    18. Image quality problem Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 18.3.30 Printer 4-Color: low image density A. Typical Faulty Images ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE 4036fs4036c0 B. Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action Paper Paper is damp. Change paper to one just unwrapped from its pack- age.

  • Page 552: Printer 4-Color: Poor Color Reproduction

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 18. Image quality problem 18.3.31 Printer 4-Color: poor color reproduction A. Typical Faulty Images 4036fs4058c0 B. Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action Paper Paper is damp. Change paper to one just unwrapped from its pack- age.

  • Page 553: Printer 4-Color: Incorrect Color Image Registration

    18. Image quality problem Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 18.3.32 Printer 4-Color: incorrect color image registration A. Typical Faulty Images 4036fs4032c0 B. Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action Warning display The maintenance call mark is dis- Take action according to played on the panel.

  • Page 554: Printer 4-Color: Void Areas, White Spots

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 18. Image quality problem 18.3.33 Printer 4-Color: void areas, white spots A. Typical Faulty Images Void areas White spots 4036fs4051c0 4036fs4050c0 B. Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action Image Check There are void areas at the front P.509 side or high density section.

  • Page 555: Printer 4-Color: Colored Spots

    18. Image quality problem Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 18.3.34 Printer 4-Color: colored spots A. Typical Faulty Images 4036fs4052c0 B. Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action Imaging Unit The surface of the PC Drum is Change Imaging Unit. scratched.
  • Page 556 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 18. Image quality problem 18.3.35 Printer 4-Color: poor fusing performance, offset A. Typical Faulty Images Poor fusing performance Offset 4036fs4059c0 4036fs4060c0 B. Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action Paper Paper type does not match. Change the setting.

  • Page 557: Printer 4-Color: Brush Effect, Blurred Image

    18. Image quality problem Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 18.3.36 Printer 4-Color: brush effect, blurred image A. Typical Faulty Images Brush effect Blurred image 4036fs4061c0 4036fs4031c0 B. Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action Paper Paper is damp. Change paper to one just unwrapped from its pack- age.

  • Page 558: Printer 4-Color: Back Marking

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 18. Image quality problem 18.3.37 Printer 4-Color: back marking A. Typical Faulty Images 4036fs4062c0 4036fs4063c0 B. Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action 2nd Image Transfer Image Transfer Roller is scratched Change 2nd Image Trans- Roller Unit or dirty.

  • Page 559: Printer 4-Color: Uneven Image

    18. Image quality problem Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 18.3.38 Printer 4-Color: uneven image A. Typical Faulty Images 4138fs4507c0 B. Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result Action Toner Cartridge The Toner Cartridge of every color Re-install it. is surely installed. PH Unit The PH Unit is surely installed.

  • Page 560: Parts Layout Drawing

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 19. Parts layout drawing Appendix 19. Parts layout drawing 19.1 Main unit 19.1.1 IR section [12] [11] [10] 4038F5E513DA Original Size Detecting Sensor/2 (PC204) Scanner Home Sensor (PC201) Image Processing Board (PWB-C) Original Cover Angle Sensor (PC202) CCD Sensor Board (PWB-A) Original Size Detecting Sensor/1 (PC203) Size Reset Switch (S201)

  • Page 561: Engine Section

    19. Parts layout drawing Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 19.1.2 Engine section [12] [11] [10] 4038F5C506DA IDC/Registration Sensor/2 (SE2) Mechanical Control Board (PWB-M) Control Panel (UN201) Slide Interface Board (PWB-SIF) IDC/Registration Sensor/1 (SE1) DIMM/0 (WORK0) High Voltage Unit (HV1) [10] DIMM/1 (WORK1) PH Interface Board (PWB-D)
  • Page 562 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 19. Parts layout drawing [13] [12] [11] [10] 4038F5C507DB Fusing Drive Motor (M4) Cooling Fan Motor/1 (M12) Main Motor (M1) Toner Supply Motor Y/M (M6) Fusing Cooling Fan Motor/2 (M11) [10] Cooling Fan Motor/2 (M22) Power Supply Cooling Fan Motor/1 (M8) [11] Toner Supply Motor C/K (M7)
  • Page 563 19. Parts layout drawing Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 [12] [11] [10] 4038F5C509DA Right Door Switch (S5) Front Door Switch/2 (S4) Primary Interlock Switch (S2) Hard Disk Drive (HDD) PH Unit Main Erase Lamp/Y (LA4) Main Power Switch (S1) [10] Main Erase Lamp/M (LA3) Total Counter (CNT1)
  • Page 564 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 19. Parts layout drawing [13] [12] [11] [10] 4038F5C511DB Developing Clutch/K (CL4) Waste Toner Full Sensor (PC8) Exit Sensor (PC2) Color PC Drive Main Sensor (PC17) Temperature/Humidity Sensor (SE3) [10] Color PC Drive Sub Sensor (PC18) Registration Roller Sensor (PC1) [11] Black PC Drive Main Sensor (PC15)
  • Page 565 19. Parts layout drawing Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 19.1.3 Tray 1 4038F5C508DA Tray 1 Paper Feed Clutch (CL2) Tray 1 Paper Size Board (PWB-I) Tray 1 Paper Empty Sensor (PC10) Tray 1 Paper Near-Empty Sensor (PC11) Tray 1 CD Paper Size Sensor (PC9) Tray 1 Device Detection Sensor (PC12)

  • Page 566: Tray 2/Multiple Bypass Tray

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 19. Parts layout drawing 19.1.4 Tray 2/Multiple bypass tray A. bizhub C250 [19] [18] [17] [16] [15] [14] [13] [12] [11] [10] 4038F5C504DA Tray 2 Vertical Transport Motor (M2-PC) [11] Tray 2 Lift-Up Sensor (PC7-PC)
  • Page 567 19. Parts layout drawing Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 B. bizhub C252 [22] [21] [20] [19] [18] [17] [16] [10] [11] [12] [15] [14] [13] 9J06F5C501DA Tray 2 Vertical Transport Motor (M2-PC) [12] Tray 2 Paper Take-up Sensor (PC9-PC) Tray 2 Door Set Sensor (PC5-PC) [13] Tray 2 Paper Empty Sensor (PC6-PC) Bypass Lift-up Sensor (PC14)

  • Page 568: Df-601 (Option)

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 19. Parts layout drawing 19.2 DF-601 (Option) [17] [16] [15] [14] [13] [12] [11] [10] 4038F5C501DA Exit Motor (M3-DF) [10] Empty Sensor (PC4-DF) Exit Cover Sensor (PC7-DF) [11] Pick-up Sensor (PC2-DF) Exit Sensor (PC6-DF) [12] Registration Sensor (PC1-DF) Turnover Sensor (PC5-DF)

  • Page 569: Pc103/Pc203 (Option)

    19. Parts layout drawing Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 19.3 PC103/PC203 (Option) [26] [25] [23] [24] [22] [21] [20] [19] [18] [17] [16] [15] [10] [13] [11] [14] [12] 4037F5C511DA Tray 3 Vertical Transport Motor (M120-PC) [14] Tray 4 Near Empty Sensor (PC122-PC) Tray 4 CD Paper Size Sensor/2 Tray 3 Door Set Sensor (PC111-PC) [15]...

  • Page 570: Pc-403 (Option)

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 19. Parts layout drawing 19.4 PC-403 (Option) [24] [23] [22] [21] [20] [19] [10] [11] [18] [12] [13] [17] [14] [15] [16] 4037F5C512DA Vertical Transport Motor (M2-LCT) [13] Manual Button Down Board (NU1-LCT) Door Set Sensor (PC5-LCT) [14] Shift Tray Stop Sensor (PC11-LCT) Vertical Transport Sensor (PC2-LCT)

  • Page 571: Ad-503 (Option)

    19. Parts layout drawing Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 19.5 AD-503 (Option) 4038F5C512DA Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 Duplex Unit Switchback Motor (M1 DU) (in PWB-A DU) (PC2 DU) Duplex Unit Door Set Sensor (PCI DU) Duplex Control Board (PWB-A DU) Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 Duplex Unit Transport Motor (M2 DU) (in PWB-A DU) (PC1 DU)

  • Page 572: Fs-501 (Option)

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 19. Parts layout drawing 19.6 FS-501 (Option) [22] [21] [20] [19] [18] [17] [10] [16] [11] [15] [14] [13] [12] 4038F5C502DA CD Aligning Home Position Sensor Upper Cover Sensor (PC18-FN) [12] (PC9-FN) 1st Tray Full Sensor (PC6-FN) [13] Shift Home Position Sensor (PC10-FN) 1st Tray Exit Sensor (PC1-FN)
  • Page 573 19. Parts layout drawing Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 [16] [15] [14] [13] [12] [11] [10] 4038F5C503DA Upper Entrance Motor (M4-FN) Exit Motor (M3-FN) Storage Roller Home Position Sensor Entrance Motor (M1-FN) [10] (PC12-FN) Exit Roller/Rolls Spacing Motor [11] Upper Paddle Motor (M15-FN) (M13-FN) Upper/Lower Entrance Switching Solenoid...

  • Page 574: Js-601 (Option)

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 19. Parts layout drawing 19.7 JS-601 (Option) 4037F5C513DA Job Tray Cover Sensor (PC21-FN) Job Tray Full Sensor (PC20-FN) Job Tray Exit Sensor (PC19-FN) 3rd Entrance Switching Solenoid (SL-4)

  • Page 575: Fs-603 (Option)

    19. Parts layout drawing Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 19.8 FS-603 (Option) [17] [16] [15] [14] [13] [12] [11] [10] 4037F5C516DA Transport Motor (M1-FN) [10] Shift Motor (M6-FN) Entrance Motor (M9-FN) [11] Slide Motor (M8-FN) Saddle Clutch (CL1-FN) [12] Exit Motor (M3-FN) Joint Open Switch (MS2-FN) [13]...
  • Page 576 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 19. Parts layout drawing [19] [20] [18] [17] [16] [15] [14] [13] [12] [11] [10] 4037F5C521DA Entrance Sensor (PI1-FN) [11] Saddle Tray Sensor (PI13-FN) Folding Roller Home Position Sensor [12] Shift Motor Clock Sensor (PI17-FN) (PI12-FN) Folding Home Position Sensor (PI11-FN) [13]...

  • Page 577: Pk-501 (Option)

    19. Parts layout drawing Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 19.9 PK-501 (Option) [10] 4037F5C517DA Punch Motor (M1P-PK) Side Registration Motor (M2P-PK) Side Registration Home Sensor (PI2P-PK) Punch Trash Full LED Board (PWB-F PK) Punch Trash Full Photo Sensor Board Punch Motor Clock Board (PI3P-PK) (PWB-E PK) Photo Sensor Board (PWB-C PK)

  • Page 578: Horizontal Transport Unit

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 19. Parts layout drawing 19.10 Horizontal Transport Unit 4037F5C518DA Entrance Switching Solenoid (SL1-HO) Paper Sensor (PC1-HO) Turnover Empty Sensor (PC6-HO) Horizontal Unit Door Sensor (PC4-HO)

  • Page 579: Fs-514 (Option)

    19. Parts layout drawing Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 19.11 FS-514 (option) [13] [14] [12] [11] [10] 9J06F5C514DA Entrance switch back sensor (PC4) Elevator top face detection sensor (PC12) Transport sensor (PC2) Exit paddle home position sensor (PC6) Entrance sensor (PC1) [10] Alignment home position sensor /1 (PC7) Storage tray detect sensor (PC3) [11] Stapler save position sensor (PC10)
  • Page 580 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 19. Parts layout drawing [12] [11] [10] 9J06F5C515DA Skew registration clutch (CL1) FS control board (FSCB) Duplex guide solenoid (SL3) Relay board/1 (REYB/1) Shutter detect switch (S2) Slide switch (S4) Relay board/2 (REYB/2) [10] Exit paddle solenoid (SL2) Storage paddle solenoid (SL1) [11] Elevator tray switch (S3) Front door switch (S1)
  • Page 581 19. Parts layout drawing Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 [11] [10] 9J06F5C516DA Cooling fan motor (M9) Elevator motor (M11) Entrance motor (M1) Align motor/1 (M5) Exit roller motor (M10) Transport motor/2 (M3) Align motor/2 (M6) [10] Shutter motor (M8) Exit motor (M4) [11] Transport motor/1 (M2) Stapling unit moving motor (M7)

  • Page 582: Pk-510 (Option)

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 19. Parts layout drawing 19.12 PK-510 (option) 9J06F5C505DA Punch Trash full sensor (PC30)

  • Page 583: Mt-501 (Option)

    19. Parts layout drawing Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 19.13 MT-501 (option) [16] [15] [14] [13] [12] [11] [10] 9J06F5C506DA Cover open/close sensor (PC11-MK) Paper detection sensor 1 (PC1-MK) Paper full detection sensor 4 (PC8-MK) [10] Paper detection sensor 2 (PC2-MK) Paper detection sensor 4 (PC4-MK) [11] Paper detection sensor 3 (PC3-MK) Paper full detection sensor 3 (PC7-MK)

  • Page 584: Sd-503 (Option)

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 19. Parts layout drawing 19.14 SD-503 (option) [14] [13] [12] [11] [10] 9J06F5C507DA Crease motor (M10-SK) Saddle tray empty sensor (PC21-SK) Crease roller home position sensor In & out guide motor (M13-SK) (P22-SK) Layable guide home sensor (PC24-SK) [10] Transport pulse sensor (PC25-SK) Saddle interlock switch (S4-SK) [11] Saddle exit motor (M8-SK)

  • Page 585: Connector Layout Drawing

    20. Connector layout drawing Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 20. Connector layout drawing Description ➀ Number of Pin Possible to confirm by removing external cover. Not possible to confirm by removing external cover. [16] [15] [14] [13] [12] [11] [10] 4038F5C515DA CN No.
  • Page 586 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 20. Connector layout drawing [16] [15] [14] [13] [12] [11] [10] 4038F5C516DA CN No. Location CN No. Location CN41 CN44 K-23 to 24 CN45 [10] CN40 E-10 E-19 [11] CN18 E-11 CN13 K-21 to 22 [12] CN60 E-26 to 27...
  • Page 587 20. Connector layout drawing Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 [12] [11] [10] 4038F5C517DA CN No. Location CN No. Location CN39 E-20 CN28 CN81 K to L-3 CN27 E-7 to 8 CN29 E-3 to 4 [10] CN32 E-12 CN22 [11] CN58 U-16 [12]...

  • Page 588: Timing Chart

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 21. Timing chart 21. Timing chart 21.1 Main unit Print request received Polygon Motor Main Motor (M1) Color PC Drum Motor (M2) Developing Bias DC (Y/M/C/K) Color Developing Motor (M3) Drum Charge Corona Bias (Y/M/C/K) 1st Image Transfer pressure/retraction...

  • Page 589: Automatic Document Feeder

    21. Timing chart Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 21.2 Automatic Document Feeder 1-sided mode...
  • Page 590 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 21. Timing chart...
  • Page 591 21. Timing chart Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006...
  • Page 592 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 21. Timing chart...
  • Page 593 21. Timing chart Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 Mixed original detection mode...
  • Page 594 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 21. Timing chart...
  • Page 595 21. Timing chart Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006...
  • Page 596 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 21. Timing chart...
  • Page 597 21. Timing chart Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006...
  • Page 598 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 21. Timing chart...
  • Page 599 21. Timing chart Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006...
  • Page 600 SERVICE MANUAL FIELD SERVICE Standard Controller 2006.08 Ver. 3.0...
  • Page 601 Revision history After publication of this service manual, the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improvement of their performance. Therefore, the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine. When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual, a revised version will be issued with a revision mark added as required.
  • Page 602 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 CONTENTS Standard Controller General Controller specifications ..................1 Type ........................1 Supporting client specifications ................2 Maintenance Checking the controller firmware version ..............3 Firmware upgrade ....................4 Outline ........................4 Preparations for firmware rewriting by Cygwin ............. 5 3.2.1 Outline......................
  • Page 603 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 Adjustment/Setting Checking the Image Controller Setting ..............37 Troubleshooting Checking the system configuration ............... 39 Status codes ......................39 Troubleshooting procedures.................. 40 Unable to print over the network................. 40 Unable to transmit data through Scan to FTP............. 41 Unable to transmit data through Scan to E-Mail/Internet FAX......

  • Page 604: General

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 1. Controller specifications General Controller specifications Type Type Built-in type controller 25 ppm (Color/B&W, A4 or 8 x 11 paper, and simplex) Print Speed 23 ppm (Color/B&W, A4 or 8 x 11 paper, and duplex) PCL5e/c Emulation Printer Language PCL6 (XL 2.1) Emulation...

  • Page 605: Supporting Client Specifications

    1. Controller specifications Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 Supporting client specifications IBM PC and its compatible 64 MB or more (128MB or more for XP) Windows 98/98SE, Windows Me, Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows NT 4.0, Windows Server 2003 Connection Ethernet 10Base-T/100Base-TX method...

  • Page 606: Maintenance

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 2. Checking the controller firmware version Maintenance Checking the controller firmware version • The version of the controller firmware can be checked on the Control Panel of the machine. 1. Call the Service Mode to the screen. 2.

  • Page 607: Firmware Upgrade

    3. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 Firmware upgrade Outline • There are two ways to update the Firmware: One is by directly connecting with the Copier using the Compact Flash, and the other is by downloading over a network using the Internet ISW.

  • Page 608: Preparations For Firmware Rewriting By Cygwin

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 3. Firmware upgrade Preparations for firmware rewriting by Cygwin 3.2.1 Outline • Write the firmware into the compact flash using Cygwin. • Cygwin consists of two types: Full install version and light version that is comprised only of necessary files.
  • Page 609 3. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 4. Specify the folder for installation. Check to make sure that “Root Directory” is in default setting, [C:\cygwin]. NOTE • Make sure to check that “Root Directory” is in default setting, [C:\cygwin]. •...
  • Page 610 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 3. Firmware upgrade 8. Click [Next (N)]. 4037F2E549DA 9. Click [Complete] to start installing. 4037F2E550DA B. For the light version 1. Decompress the downloaded compressed file “cygwin_rhein_phase2.zip” directly to the C drive (Windows system drive). 2.

  • Page 611: Settings Of The Windows Environmental Variable

    3. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 3.2.4 Settings of the Windows Environmental Variable 1. After installing, open the Property of “My Computer”, and click the “Environmental Vari- able” of “Advanced” tab. 2. Click the “New” in System Variable Setting. 4036fs2620e0 3.

  • Page 612: Writing Into The Compact Flash

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 3. Firmware upgrade 3.2.5 Writing into the Compact flash 1. Put the data of Firmware in the optional directory. (C:\bizhub in the below figure) 4038F2E562DB NOTE • The file name of Firmware data consists of the “Release Date_Version_CHECKSUM-****.exe.”...
  • Page 613 3. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 3. Mount the Compact flash on the PC, and check the Drive name, which was recognized in the Windows. (F-drive in the following figure) 4036fs2623e0 4. Click [Start] → [Program] → [Accessories] → [Command Prompt] to open the Com- mand Prompt.
  • Page 614 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 3. Firmware upgrade 7. Once the “mkcf.bat” is executed, data writing into the Compact flash is started. 8. Upon completion of writing, CHECKSUM is executed. If CHECKSUM value is precisely matched, “VERIFY OK” appears. 4038F2E565DB 9.

  • Page 615: Preparations For Firmware Rewriting By Firmware Imaging Toolkit 2006

    • This software is designed as the tool to write firmware data of MFP/printer released by KMBT into the compact flash card. 3.3.1 Correspond model • Correspond models of the software is as follows. • bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C352/C450 Color machine • bizhub C250P/C252P/C352P/C450P • bizhub 200/250/350 B/W machine •...

  • Page 616: Installation Of Software

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 3. Firmware upgrade 3.3.4 Installation of software • Follow the procedures shown below to install the software. NOTE • Install the software to the PC with the administration authentication. • When any anti-virus program is activated, quite the program before the installa- tion.
  • Page 617 3. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 3. After checking the contents of license agreement, select [I accept the terms in the license agreement] and click [Next >]. 9J06F2E701DA 4. Select the installed destination folder of Firmware Imaging Toolkit 2006, and click [Next>].

  • Page 618: Update Of Software

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 3. Firmware upgrade 5. Click [Install] to start installation. 6. Click [Finish] to complete the installation. 9J06F2E703DA 7. Shortcut file will be created inside Windows Start menu ([Program] → [KONICA MINOLTA] → [Firmware Imaging Toolkit 2006]). 9J06F2E708DA 3.3.5 Update of software...

  • Page 619: Screen

    3. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 3.3.6 Screen A. Main window • The main window will be displayed after activating the software. • Main window consists of 2 patterns: Basic mode, Advanced mode When the advanced mode is selected 9J06F2E704DA About •...
  • Page 620 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 3. Firmware upgrade B. Settings dialog • It will be displayed by clicking [Settings] at main window. • Other settings will be enabled by selecting the check box of [Enabled Advanced Fea- tures]. 9J06F2E705DA Enable Advanced •...

  • Page 621: Details Of Each Function

    3. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 3.3.7 Details of each function A. Basic functions (1) Write Firmware to a card • To write FW data into the compact flash. The FW data of the models shown below can be written.
  • Page 622 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 3. Firmware upgrade B. Advanced functions (1) Create a Firmware Image from a card • Create the image file from the firmware data written into the compact flash. Create the image file by dumping directly the data in the card. This function allows us to save the various type of firmware data in the compact flash as the image file and hold as copy data.

  • Page 623: How To Write Firmware Data

    3. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 3.3.8 How to write firmware data A. In the case of C450/C450P/C351/C352/C352P/C300/C250/C252/C250P/C252P series 1. Put the firmware data in the optional directory. (C:\bizhub in the below figure) 9J06F2E710DA NOTE • The file name of firmware data consists of the “Release Date_Version_CHECKSUM-****.exe.”...
  • Page 624 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 3. Firmware upgrade 3. Mount the compact flash on the PC, and check the drive name, which was recognized in the Windows. (F-drive in the following figure) 9J06F2E712DA 4. Start Firmware Imaging Toolkit 2006. NOTE •...
  • Page 625 3. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 6. Click [Browse]. 9J06F2E707DA 7. Select the file type [C450/ C351/C352/ C300/C350/C250 Indexed Firmware]. 9J06F2E713DA 8. Move to the folder decompressed at step 2, confirm that only "###_cf.tar.gz" (### is for model name) is displayed, and select.
  • Page 626 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 3. Firmware upgrade 10. Select the drive that the compact flash is inserted, which is confirmed at step 3. NOTE • The drives other than the compact flash that is recognized as “Removable Disk” can be selected for the writing destination.
  • Page 627 3. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 13. Click [Yes], and data writing starts. NOTE • Writing a card is a resource intensive operation for your computer - do not attempt to multitask (use the computer for anything else) during the writing procedure. 14.

  • Page 628: Firmware Rewriting By Compact Flash

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 3. Firmware upgrade Firmware rewriting by compact flash • The F/W is updated using the compact flash. 3.4.1 Updating method NOTE • NEVER remove or insert the Compact Flash card with the machine power turned 1.
  • Page 629 3. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 F/W to be updated Appropriate board MFP CONTROLLER MFP Control Board (PWB-MFP) SCANNER Image Processing Board (PWB-C) PRINTER Mechanical Control Board (PWB-M) FAX BOARD CONTROLLER1 Fax Board (Main) *1 FAX BOARD CONTROLLER2 Fax Board (Sub) *2 *1: The Optional FAX kit is necessary for the above procedure.

  • Page 630: Action When Data Transfer Fails

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 3. Firmware upgrade 3.4.2 Action When Data Transfer Fails • If “NG” appears on the Control Panel, indicating that rewriting has been unsuccessful (in which case the Start key lights up red), take the following steps. 1.

  • Page 631: Updating The Firmware With The Internet Isw

    3. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 Updating the Firmware with the Internet ISW 3.5.1 Out line • [Internet ISW] is the system which gives the instruction for updating the Firmware with the control panel of the Copier, so the Copier will automatically receive the Firmware from the Program Server over a network for updating.
  • Page 632 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 3. Firmware upgrade B. Protocol Setting • It performs the setting concerning the Protocol (ftp or http) for connecting to the Internet ISW. • When connecting to the Program Server using a proxy server, perform the setting for a Proxy Server.
  • Page 633 3. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 C. Forwarding Access Setting • To make the access setting for the Program Server which stores the Firmware data. 1. Select [Internet ISW] which is available from [Service Mode]. 2. Touch [Forwarding Access Setting]. 4037F2E622DA 3.

  • Page 634: Firmware Rewriting

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 3. Firmware upgrade 3.5.4 Firmware rewriting NOTE • When performing the Internet ISW, ask the administrator for permission before- hand. • Do not turn power OFF while downloading. A. Conducting rewriting on the control panel. 1.
  • Page 635 3. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 B. During Firmware Updating 1. The message to indicate the status will be displayed on the screen while connecting or transferring data. C. Completed or failed (1) Firmware updated normally 1. When the Firmware is normally updated, restart the Copier in auto or manual mode to display the outcome, and touch [OK] to return to the Main screen.
  • Page 636 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 3. Firmware upgrade (3) Failing to update the Firmware after downloading has started 1. Once Firmware updating has started, the ROM in the Copier will be deleted. When it failed right after updating has started, restart the Copier, and shift to the standby screen to retry downloading.

  • Page 637: Error Code List For The Internet Isw

    [Service Mode] → [Internet ISW] → [Transfer access setting] • If the above process does not solve the problem, inform the corresponding error code to the KONICA MINOLTA. • Check if the following setting is set to “Valid”. [Service Mode] → [Internet ISW] →...
  • Page 638 [Internet ISW setting] PSWC, etc. • If the above process does not solve the • There is no space for F/W data to be 0x10000104 problem, inform the corresponding downloaded. error code to the KONICA MINOLTA. 0x10000106 • Check sum error...
  • Page 639 3. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 Error code Description Countermeasure Control panel File access error • The file downloaded has an error. • The header of the file which has been read has an error. • Check to see if the downloaded F/W is 0x10000107 •...

  • Page 640: Adjustment/Setting

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 4. Checking the Image Controller Setting Adjustment/Setting Checking the Image Controller Setting • Whenever the controller is mounted, it is necessary to select “Controller 0” in [Image Controller Setting]. 1. Call the Service Mode to the screen. 2.
  • Page 641 4. Checking the Image Controller Setting Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 Blank Page...

  • Page 642: Troubleshooting

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 5. Checking the system configuration Troubleshooting Checking the system configuration • When a malfunction occurs, let the printer print a Configuration Page to check for system configuration. 1. Press the Utility/Counter key. 2. Touch [User Setting] → [Printer Setting] → [Print Reports]. 3.

  • Page 643: Troubleshooting Procedures

    7. Troubleshooting procedures Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 Troubleshooting procedures Unable to print over the network. Check Possible Cause Action Remark An error on machine side (paper running Correct the error. out, toner running out, etc.) See “User’s Guide Check the machine [Copy Operations]”...

  • Page 644: Unable To Transmit Data Through Scan To Ftp

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 7. Troubleshooting procedures Unable to transmit data through Scan to FTP. Check Possible Cause Action Remark The FTP server is not in Check with the network service. administrator. Check with the network IP address of the FTP administrator and enter server is wrong.

  • Page 645: Unable To Transmit Data Through Scan To E-Mail/Internet Fax

    7. Troubleshooting procedures Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 Unable to transmit data through Scan to E-Mail/Internet FAX. Check Possible Cause Action Remark The SMTP server is not in Check with the network service. administrator. Check with the network IP address of the SMTP administrator and enter the server is wrong.
  • Page 646 SERVICE MANUAL FIELD SERVICE DF-601 2005.07 Ver. 1.0...
  • Page 647 Revision history After publication of this service manual, the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improvement of their performance. Therefore, the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine. When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual, a revised version will be issued with a revision mark added as required.
  • Page 648 Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 CONTENTS DF-601 General Product specifications ..................... 1 Mixed original feed ....................3 Mixed original feed chart..................3 Paper feed prohibited originals ................4 Paper feed not guaranteed originals..............4 Maintenance Periodical check ...................... 5 Maintenance procedure (Periodical check parts) ..........
  • Page 649 Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 Mechanical adjustment ..................18 Adjustment of the tray volume ................18 Adjustment of the document edge guide reference position ......19 Adjustment of the document skew..............20 Adjustment of the document stop position ............21 8.4.1 Auto adjust: Sub Scanning Direction 1-Sided Stop Position.......

  • Page 650: General

    Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 1. Product specifications General Product specifications A. Type Name Duplexing Document Feeder Paper Take-Up Paper Take-Up from top of stack Transport Endless Belt Transport Mode Type Turnover Loop Turnover Mode U-turn Turnover + Switchback U-Turn Turnover Paper Exit Mode (only in 1-Sided Mode) Installation...
  • Page 651 1. Product specifications Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 D. Machine specifications DC 24 V (supplied from the main unit) Power Requirements DC 5 V (generated within the DF-601) Max. Power 60 W or less Consumption 586 mm (W) × 519 mm (D) × 135 mm (H) Dimensions 23 inch (W) ×...

  • Page 652: Mixed Original Feed

    Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 2. Mixed original feed Mixed original feed Mixed original feed chart For Metric Max. Original 297 mm 257 mm 210 mm 182 mm 148 mm Size Mixed Original Size 297 mm 257 mm 210 mm 182 mm 148 mm For Inch...

  • Page 653: Paper Feed Prohibited Originals

    2. Mixed original feed Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 Paper feed prohibited originals • If fed, trouble occurrence will be highly possible. Type of Original Possible Trouble Take-up failure, damaged sheet, defective drive Sheets stapled or clipped together mechanism due to jammed staples or clips Sheets glued together Take-up failure, damaged sheet Take-up failure...

  • Page 654: Maintenance

    Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 3. Periodical check Maintenance Periodical check Maintenance procedure (Periodical check parts) NOTE • The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure of Maintenance represents the isopropyl alcohol. 3.1.1 Transport Belt A. Replacing procedure 1. Remove two C-clips [1]. 4582s2501c0 2.

  • Page 655: Pick-Up Roller / Paper Take-Up Roller

    3. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 5. Remove the Transport Belt [7]. 4582fs2505c0 3.1.2 Pick-up Roller / Paper Take-up Roller A. Replacing procedure 1. Open the Paper Take-up Section Cover [1], press inward and unlock the locking claws [2] at both ends of the Paper Take-up Section Guide (the Inner Cover), and remove the Paper Take-up Section Guide [3].

  • Page 656: Separation Roller

    Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 3. Periodical check 5. Remove C-clip (black) of the Paper Take-up Roller, and remove the Paper Take-up Roller [12]. NOTE • Be careful not to lose the Pick-Up/ Take-Up Roller fixing pin. [12] 4582fs2509c0 3.1.3 Separation Roller A.

  • Page 657: Pick-Up Roller / Paper Take-Up Roller / Separation Roller

    3. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 3.1.4 Pick-up Roller / Paper Take-up Roller / Separation Roller A. Cleaning procedure 1. Open the Paper Take-up Section Cover [1]. 2. Wet a cloth with alcohol, and use it to wipe up the Pick-up Roller [2], Paper Take-up Roller [3] and Separation Roller [4].

  • Page 658: Exit Roller / Roll

    Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 3. Periodical check 3.1.6 Exit Roller / Roll A. Cleaning procedure 1. Open the Paper Exit Section Cover [1]. 2. Wet a cloth with alcohol, and use it to wipe up the Exit Roller [2]/Roll [3]. 4582fs2515c0 3.1.7 Turnover Roller...
  • Page 659 3. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 3. Remove the Registration Roller Cover. See P.8 4. Clean the Paper Empty Sensor [3] with a brush or the like. 4582fs2519c0 5. Open the Paper Exit Section Cover. 6. Clean the Paper Exit Sensor [4] with a brush or the like.

  • Page 660: Other

    Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 4. Other Other Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items A. Screws to which blue paint or green paint is applied • Blue paint or green paint is applied to some screws to prevent them from coming loose. •...

  • Page 661: Disassembly/Assembly List (Other Parts)

    4. Other Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 Disassembly/Assembly list (Other parts) Section Part name Ref. page Front Cover P.12 Exterior Parts Rear Cover P.12 Disassembly/Assembly procedure 4.3.1 Front Cover/Rear Cover 4582fs2521c0 1. Open the Paper Take-up Section Cover [1] and the Paper Exit Section Cover [2]. 2.

  • Page 662: Adjustment/Setting

    Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 5. How to use the adjustment section Adjustment/Setting How to use the adjustment section • “Adjustment/Setting” contains detailed information on the adjustment items and proce- dures for this machine. • Throughout this “Adjustment/Setting,” the default settings are indicated by “ ”. Advance Checks Before attempting to solve the customer problem, the following advance checks must be made.

  • Page 663: Service / Test Mode

    6. Service / Test Mode Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 Service / Test Mode • The Service / Test Modes are set from the Service Mode screen of the main unit. Service Mode setting procedure 1. Press the [Utility/Counter] key. 2.

  • Page 664: Adf Paper Passage

    Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 6. Service / Test Mode ADF Paper Passage • The Paper Passage motion of the Automatic Document Feeder is checked. <Procedure> 1. Set the mode to the Service Mode. 2. Touch the [ADF] key. 3.

  • Page 665: Sensor Check

    7. Sensor Check Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 Sensor Check Check procedure • To allow sensors to be checked for operation easily and safely, data applied to the IC on the board can be checked on the panel with the main unit in the standby state (including a misfeed, malfunction, and closure failure condition).
  • Page 666 Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 7. Sensor Check A. Sensor monitor Operation characteristics/ Panel display Symbol Panel display Part/Signal name PC4-DF Empty Empty Sensor Paper not Paper present present PC3-DF Original Take-Up Unit Take-up Cover Sensor OPEN CLOSE Interlock PC202 Transport Convey Original Cover Angle Sensor...

  • Page 667: Mechanical Adjustment

    8. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 Mechanical adjustment Adjustment of the tray volume • Read out the value of maximum width and minimum width of the document width detec- tion volume interlocked with the Document Take-up Tray Edge Guide. <Procedure>...

  • Page 668: Adjustment Of The Document Edge Guide Reference Position

    Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 8. Mechanical adjustment Adjustment of the document edge guide reference position Adjustment standard: Displacement of the document edge should be within 4 ± 1 mm to the FD scale. A. Adjustment procedure 1. Place the chart furnished with the Document Feeder in the document feeding tray [1] (with the side having an arrow facing up).

  • Page 669: Adjustment Of The Document Skew

    8. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 Adjustment of the document skew Adjustment standard: Skew should be ± 1.0 % or less with respect to the document length; within 3.0 mm for document of A4 size. 1. Place the chart furnished with the Document Feeder in the document feeding tray [1] (with the side having an arrow facing up).

  • Page 670: Adjustment Of The Document Stop Position

    Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 8. Mechanical adjustment Adjustment of the document stop position • Adjustment of the document stop position is made automatically and manually (by enter- ing numbers). The following adjustment is made in the Service Mode. 4582F3E513DA 8.4.1 Auto adjust: Sub Scanning Direction 1-Sided Stop Position...

  • Page 671: Auto Adjust: Sub Scanning Direction 2-Sided Stop Position

    8. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 7. Make sure that Result is OK. Then, touch [SET]. 8. Touch [END]. 9. Touch [Exit] on the Service Mode screen. If the Result is Unable: • Check and correct the skew of the document.

  • Page 672: Auto Adjust: Main Scanning Direction Image Scan Start Position

    Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 8. Mechanical adjustment 8.4.3 Auto adjust: Main Scanning Direction Image scan start position A. Adjustment procedure 1. Set the mode to the Service Mode. 2. Touch [ADF]. 3. Touch [Auto Stop Position Adjustment]. 4. Touch [Main Scanning Direction]. 4582F3E522DA 5.

  • Page 673: Manual Adjust: Sub Scanning Direction 1-Sided / 2-Sided Document Stop Position Adjustment

    8. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 8.4.4 Manual adjust: Sub Scanning Direction 1-Sided / 2-Sided document stop position adjustment Adjusted range: -7 mm to + 7 mm A. Adjustment procedure 1. Set the mode to the Service Mode. 2.

  • Page 674: Manual Adjust: Main Scanning Direction Image Scan Position Adjustment

    Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 8. Mechanical adjustment 8.4.5 Manual adjust: Main Scanning Direction Image scan position adjustment Adjusted range: -3 mm to + 3 mm A. Adjustment procedure 1. Set the mode to the Service Mode. 2. Touch [ADF]. 3.

  • Page 675: Adjustment Of The Loop Value

    8. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 Adjustment of the loop value Adjusted range: -5 mm to + 5 mm Default value: 0 (Loop value: 5 mm) • The loop value is increased by the entered + value and decreased by the entered - value. •...

  • Page 676: Automatic Adjustment Of The Sensor

    Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 8. Mechanical adjustment Automatic adjustment of the sensor • The detection level of the document through path sensor is automatically adjusted. • The adjustment has two modes: [Initialize And Sensor Auto Adj.] and [ADF Sensor Auto Adj.].
  • Page 677 8. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 Blank Page...

  • Page 678: Troubleshooting

    Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 9. Jam Display Troubleshooting Jam Display Initial check items • When a paper misfeed occurs, first perform the following initial check items. Check item Action Does paper meet product specifications? Replace paper. Replace paper. Is the paper curled, wavy, or damp? Instruct the user on the correct paper storage procedures.

  • Page 679: Sensor Layout

    9. Jam Display Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 Sensor layout 4582fs4502c0 [1] Exit Sensor PC6-DF [3] Pick-up Sensor PC2-DF [2] Turnover Sensor PC5-DF [4] Registration Sensor PC1-DF Solution 9.4.1 Paper Exit / Turnover section misfeed A. Detection timing Type Description Misfeed due to paper Misfeed is detected if the Turnover Sensor (PC5-DF) is not turned OFF...

  • Page 680: Paper Take-Up Section Misfeed

    Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 9. Jam Display 9.4.2 Paper Take-Up section misfeed A. Detection timing Type Description Misfeed due to paper not Misfeed is detected if the Registration Sensor (PC1-DF) is not turned reached the Registration ON within a preset time after the Take-up Motor (M1-DF) started normal Sensor rotation.

  • Page 681: Transport Section Misfeed

    9. Jam Display Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 9.4.3 Transport section misfeed A. Detection timing Type Description Misfeed due to paper Misfeed is detected if the Pick-up Sensor (PC2-DF) is not turned OFF remaining at the Pick-Up within a preset time after the Take-up Motor (M1-DF) started reverse Sensor rotation.

  • Page 682: Transport Tray Section Misfeed

    Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 9. Jam Display 9.4.4 Transport Tray section misfeed A. Detection timing Type Description Misfeed due to paper not Misfeed is detected if the Exit Sensor (PC6-DF) is not turned ON within a reached the Exit Sensor preset time after exit operation started in the 1-Sided Mode.

  • Page 683: 10. Set Error Detection

    10. Set error detection Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 10. Set error detection • When the ADF or cover set error for some reason is detected, the Panel of the main unit will have the following display. 4582F4E501DA <Panel display and detection timing for each> Panel Description of error Detection start...
  • Page 684 SERVICE MANUAL FIELD SERVICE PC-103/PC-203 2005.07 Ver. 1.0...
  • Page 685 Revision history After publication of this service manual, the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improvement of their performance. Therefore, the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine. When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual, a revised version will be issued with a revision mark added as required.
  • Page 686 Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 CONTENTS PC-103/PC-203 General Product specifications ..................... 1 Maintenance Periodical check ...................... 3 Maintenance procedure (Periodical check parts) ..........3 2.1.1 Replacing the Separation Roller Assy............3 2.1.2 Replacing the Paper Take-up Roller.............. 4 2.1.3 Replacing the Pick-up Roller.................
  • Page 687 Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 Troubleshooting Jam Display......................19 Misfeed display ....................19 7.1.1 Misfeed display resetting procedure ............19 Sensor layout...................... 20 Solution ......................21 7.3.1 Initial check items ..................21 7.3.2 Tray3 Paper Take-Up section/Vertical Transport section misfeed (PC-103/PC-203) ..................

  • Page 688: General

    Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 1. Product specifications General Product specifications A. Type Name 2 way Paper Take-Up Cabinet Type Front loading type 2 way paper take-up device Installation Desk type Document Alignment Center B. Paper type Plain paper 60 to 90 g/m (16 to 24 lb) Type...
  • Page 689 1. Product specifications Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 Blank Page...

  • Page 690: Maintenance

    Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 2. Periodical check Maintenance Periodical check Maintenance procedure (Periodical check parts) 2.1.1 Replacing the Separation Roller Assy 1. Remove the Right Door. See P.10 2. Remove two screws [1] and remove the Jam Access Cover [2]. 4348fs2611c0 3.

  • Page 691: Replacing The Paper Take-Up Roller

    2. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 NOTES • Install the Separation Roller Assy while pressing the holder down so that it aligns to the metal bracket of the machine. • Make sure that the Separation Roller Assy is not tilted to the right or left when installed.
  • Page 692 Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 2. Periodical check 7. Remove two screws [6] and remove the Paper Take-up Cover [7]. 4348fs2605c0 8. Remove the C-ring [8] and remove the bushing [9]. 4348fs2606c0 [10] 9. Shift the Shaft Assy [10] in the orien- tation as shown on the left, and remove the C-ring [11] and the gear [12].

  • Page 693: Replacing The Pick-Up Roller

    2. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 [18] 11. Remove two E-rings [16] and the [16] [16] bushing [17], and remove the Pick- up Roller Fixing Bracket Assy [18]. [17] 4348fs2609c0 12. Remove the C-ring [19] and remove the Paper Take-up Roller [20].
  • Page 694 Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 2. Periodical check 6. Remove two screws [4] and remove the Paper Separation Roller Mount- ing Bracket Assy [5] together with frame. 4348fs2617c0 7. Remove two screws [6] and remove the Paper Take-up Cover [7]. 4348fs2605c0 8.

  • Page 695: Other

    3. Other Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 Other Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items A. Screws to which blue paint or green paint is applied • Blue paint or green paint is applied to some screws to prevent them from coming loose. •...

  • Page 696: Disassembly/Assembly/Cleaning List (Other Parts)

    Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 3. Other Disassembly/Assembly/Cleaning list (Other parts) 3.2.1 Disassembly/Assembly parts list Section Part name Ref. page Right Door P.10 Rear Right Cover P.10 Exterior parts Lower Right Cover P.10 Front Right Cover P.10 Rear Cover P.10 3.2.2 Cleaning parts list...

  • Page 697: Disassembly/Assembly Procedure

    3. Other Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 Disassembly/Assembly procedure 3.3.1 Right Door/Rear Right Cover/Lower Right Cover/Front Right Cover 4061F2C503DA 1. Open the Right Door [1]. 2. Remove the Right Door [1]. 3. Remove two screws [2] and remove the Rear Right Cover [3]. 4.
  • Page 698 Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 3. Other Cleaning procedure NOTE • The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure represents the isopropyl alcohol. 3.4.1 Separation Roller 1. Remove the Right Door. See P.10 2. Remove two screws [1] and remove the Jam Access Cover [2].
  • Page 699 3. Other Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 3.4.3 Pick-up Roller 1. Remove the Tray3. (Remove the Tray4 from 4th row.) 2. Remove the Paper Separation Roller Mounting Bracket Assy. See the procedures 1 to 3 in page 11 “Cleaning of the Separation Roller.” 3.
  • Page 700 Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 4. How to use the adjustment section Adjustment/Setting How to use the adjustment section • “Adjustment/Setting” contains detailed information on the adjustment items and proce- dures for this machine. • Throughout this “Adjustment/Setting,” the default settings are indicated by “ ”. Advance Checks Before attempting to solve the customer problem, the following advance checks must be made.
  • Page 701 5. Sensor check Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 Sensor check Check procedure • To allow sensors to be checked for operation easily and safely, data applied to the IC on the board can be checked on the panel with the main unit in the standby state (including a misfeed, malfunction, and closure failure condition).
  • Page 702 Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 5. Sensor check 5.2.2 Sensor check list A. Sensor monitor 1 (PC-103/PC-203) Operation characteris- tics/Panel display Symbol Panel display Part/Signal name PC112-PC Tray3 Device Detection Tray3 Device Detection Sensor Out of position PC115-PC Paper Empty Tray3 Empty Sensor Paper not Paper...
  • Page 703 6. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 Mechanical adjustment Adjusting the paper reference position NOTE • Make this adjustment after any of the following procedures has been performed. When the PH Unit has been replaced. When the image on the print is offset in the sub scan direction. When a faint image occurs on the leading edge of the image.
  • Page 704 Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 6. Mechanical adjustment • If adjustment cannot be completed only by inputting numeric value, perform adjustment according to the following procedure. 8. Slide out the drawer [1] and unload paper from it. 9. Loosen three screws [2] at the center of the Paper Lifting Plate.
  • Page 705 6. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 6.1.2 Dup Print Positioning: Side Edge 1. Call the Service Mode to the screen. For details of how to display the Service Mode screen, see the Adjustment/Setting of the Main Unit Service Manual. 2.
  • Page 706 Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 7. Jam Display Troubleshooting Jam Display Misfeed display • When misfeed occurs, message, misfeed location “Blinking” and paper location “Light- ing” are displayed on the Touch Panel of the main unit. 4061F4C800DA Code Misfeed location Misfeed access location Action 1301...
  • Page 707 7. Jam Display Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 Sensor layout 4061F4C802DA [1] Tray2 Vertical Transport Sensor PC8-PC [4] Tray4 Vertical Transport Sensor PC126-PC [2] Tray3 Vertical Transport Sensor PC117-PC [5] Tray4 Take-up Sensor PC125-PC [3] Tray3 Take-up Sensor PC116-PC...
  • Page 708 Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 7. Jam Display Solution 7.3.1 Initial check items • When a paper misfeed occurs, first perform the following initial check items. Check item Action Does paper meet product specifications? Replace paper. Replace paper. Is the paper curled, wavy, or damp? Instruct the user on the correct paper storage procedures.
  • Page 709 7. Jam Display Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 7.3.2 Tray3 Paper Take-Up section/Vertical Transport section misfeed (PC-103/PC-203) A. Detection timing Type Description The leading edge of the paper does not block the Tray3 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC117-PC) even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Tray3 Take-up Tray3 Paper Take- Motor (M122-PC) is energized.
  • Page 710 Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 7. Jam Display 7.3.3 Tray4 Paper Take-Up section/Vertical Transport section misfeed (PC-203) A. Detection timing Type Description The leading edge of the paper does not block the Tray4 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC126-PC) even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Tray4 Take-up Tray4 Paper Take- Motor (M123-PC) is energized.
  • Page 711 8. Trouble code Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 Trouble code Trouble code display • The main unit’s CPU performs a self-diagnostics function that, on detecting a malfunc- tion, gives the corresponding malfunction code on the Touch Panel. 4061F4E504DA Trouble code list Code Item Description...
  • Page 712 Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 8. Trouble code Solution 8.3.1 C0206: Tray3 Lift-Up Failure C0208: Tray4 Lift-Up Failure Relevant electrical parts Tray3 Lift-up Motor (M124-PC) Control Board (PWB-C2 PC) Tray4 Lift-Up Motor (M125-PC) Main unit Mechanical Control Board (PWB-M) Tray3 Lift-up Upper Sensor (PC114-PC) Main unit DC Power Supply (PU1) Tray4 Lift-up Upper Sensor (PC123-PC)
  • Page 713 8. Trouble code Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 Blank Page...
  • Page 714 SERVICE MANUAL FIELD SERVICE PC-403 2005.07 Ver. 1.0...
  • Page 715 Revision history After publication of this service manual, the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improvement of their performance. Therefore, the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine. When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual, a revised version will be issued with a revision mark added as required.
  • Page 716 Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 CONTENTS PC-403 General Product specification ....................1 Maintenance Periodical check ...................... 3 Maintenance procedure (Periodical check parts) ..........3 2.1.1 Replacing the Separation Roller Assy............3 2.1.2 Replacing the Paper Take-up Roller.............. 4 2.1.3 Replacing the Pick-up Roller.................
  • Page 717 Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 6.1.1 Print Positioning: Side Edge ............... 20 6.1.2 Dup Print Positioning: Side Edge..............22 Shifter movement timing belt adjustment ............22 Troubleshooting Jam Display......................25 Misfeed display ....................25 7.1.1 Misfeed display resetting procedure ............25 Sensor layout......................
  • Page 718 Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 1. Product specification General Product specification A. Type Name Large Capacity Cabinet Type Front loading type LCC Installation Desk type Document Alignment Center B. Paper type Type Plain paper 60 to 90 g/m (16 to 24 lb) Recycled paper 60 to 90 g/m (16 to 24 lb)
  • Page 719 1. Product specification Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 Blank Page...
  • Page 720 Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 2. Periodical check Maintenance Periodical check Maintenance procedure (Periodical check parts) 2.1.1 Replacing the Separation Roller Assy 1. Remove the Right Door. See P.10 2. Remove two screws [1] and remove the Paper Separation Roller Mount- ing Bracket Assy [2].
  • Page 721 2. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 2.1.2 Replacing the Paper Take-up Roller 1. Remove the Rear Cover and the Rear Right Cover. See P.10 2. Remove the Tray3. 3. Remove the Paper Separation Roller Mounting Bracket Assy. See the procedures 1 to 2 in page 3 “Separation Roller Assy.”...
  • Page 722 Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 2. Periodical check 8. Remove two C-rings [8] and remove the bushing [9]. 4348fs2505c0 9. Shift the Shaft Assy [10] in the orien- [10] tation as shown on the left, and remove the C-ring [11] and the gear [12].
  • Page 723 2. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 12. Remove the C-ring [16] and remove the Paper Take-up Roller [17]. [16] [17] 4348fs2508c0 NOTE • Replace the Separation Roller Assy, Paper Take-up Roller and Pick-up Roller at the same time. 2.1.3 Replacing the Pick-up Roller 1.
  • Page 724 Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 2. Periodical check 7. Remove two screws [6] and remove the Paper Take-up Cover [7]. 4348fs2515c0 8. Remove two C-rings [8], two bush- ings [9], and the Pick-up Roller Assy [10]. [10] 4348fs2517c0 9. Remove the C-ring [11] and remove the Pick-up Roller [12].
  • Page 725 3. Other Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 Other Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items A. Screws to which blue paint or green paint is applied • Blue paint or green paint is applied to some screws to prevent them from coming loose. •...

  • Page 726: Right Door/Rear Right Cover/Lower Right Cover/Front Right Cover

    Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 3. Other Disassembly/Assembly/Cleaning list (Other parts) 3.2.1 Disassembly/Assembly parts list Section Part name Ref. page Right Door P.10 Rear Right Cover P.10 Exterior Parts Lower Right Cover P.10 Front Right Cover P.10 Rear Cover P.10 Drawer P.11...

  • Page 727: Rear Cover

    3. Other Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 Disassembly/Assembly procedure 3.3.1 Right Door/Rear Right Cover/Lower Right Cover/Front Right Cover 4061F2C504DA 1. Open the Right Door [1]. 2. Remove the Right Door [1]. 3. Remove two screws [2] and remove the Rear Right Cover [3]. 4.
  • Page 728 Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 3. Other 3.3.3 Drawer 1. Press the Drawer Eject Button [1] and slide out the drawer [2]. 2. Remove the paper. 3. Remove four screws [3] and slide out the drawer [2]. 4348fs2522c0 4. Remove two screws [4], the connec- tor [5], and remove the Connector Board [6].
  • Page 729 3. Other Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 5. Remove two screws [6] and remove the Driver Cover [7]. 4348fs2527c0 6. Remove three screws [8] and remove the Driver Mounting Plate Assy [9]. 4348fs2528c0 NOTE [10] • When assembling, be sure to engage rib of gear 1 [10] with con- vex section of gear 2 [11].
  • Page 730 Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 3. Other 11. Remove the Ground Plate [17]. [18] 12. Remove four Cable Holding Jigs [18] [19] [18] and remove the Main Drawer [19]. NOTE [18] • Use care not to bend the wires. [18] [17] 4348fs2532c0...

  • Page 731: Cleaning Procedure

    3. Other Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 Cleaning procedure NOTE • The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure represents the isopropyl alcohol. 3.4.1 Separation Roller 1. Remove the Right Door. See P.10 2. Remove two screws [1] and remove the Paper Separation Roller Mount- ing Bracket Assy [2].

  • Page 732: Vertical Transport Roller

    Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 3. Other 3.4.4 Vertical Transport Roller 1. Open the Right Door. 2. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the Vertical Transport Roller [1] clean of dirt. 4348fs2519c0...
  • Page 733 3. Other Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 Blank Page...

  • Page 734: Adjustment/Setting

    Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 4. How to use the adjustment section Adjustment/Setting How to use the adjustment section • “Adjustment/Setting” contains detailed information on the adjustment items and proce- dures for this machine. • Throughout this “Adjustment/Setting,” the default settings are indicated by “ ”. Advance Checks Before attempting to solve the customer problem, the following advance checks must be made.

  • Page 735: Sensor Check

    5. Sensor check Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 Sensor check Check procedure • To allow sensors to be checked for operation easily and safely, data applied to the IC on the board can be checked on the panel with the main unit in the standby state (including a misfeed, malfunction, and closure failure condition).

  • Page 736: Sensor Check List

    Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 5. Sensor check 5.2.2 Sensor check list Sensor monitor 2 Operation characteristics/ Panel display Symbol Panel display Part/Signal name PC4-LCT Lift-Up Upper Lift-Up Upper Sensor Raised Not raised Position PC13-LCT Lift-Up Lower Lift-Up Lower Sensor Lowered Not lowered Position...

  • Page 737: Mechanical Adjustment

    6. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 Mechanical adjustment Adjusting the paper reference position NOTE • Make this adjustment after any of the following procedures has been performed. When the PH Unit has been replaced. When the image on the print is offset in the sub scan direction. When a faint image occurs on the leading edge of the image.
  • Page 738 Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 6. Mechanical adjustment 8. Press the Drawer Release button [1] and then slide out the drawer [2] from the Paper Feed Cabinet. 4348fs3510c0 9. Open the Right Door. 10. Loosen the adjustment screw [3] and turn screw D [4] to make the adjust- ment.

  • Page 739: Dup Print Positioning: Side Edge

    6. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 6.1.2 Dup Print Positioning: Side Edge 1. Call the Service Mode to the screen. For details of how to display the Service Mode screen, see the Adjustment/Setting of the Main Unit Service Manual. 2.
  • Page 740 Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 6. Mechanical adjustment 3. Remove two screws [3] and remove the Shifter [4]. 4348fs3502c0 4. Push the tab [6] of the Shift Tray [5] as shown on the left and release the lock. 5. Remove the Shift Tray [5]. 4348fs3503c0 6.
  • Page 741 6. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 Blank Page...

  • Page 742: Troubleshooting

    Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 7. Jam Display Troubleshooting Jam Display Misfeed display • When misfeed occurs, message, misfeed location “Blinking” and paper location “Light- ing” are displayed on the Touch Panel of the main unit. 4061F4C801DA Code Misfeed location Misfeed access location Action 1501...

  • Page 743: Sensor Layout

    7. Jam Display Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 Sensor layout 4061F4C803DA [1] Tray 2 Vertical Transport Sensor PC8-PC [3] Paper Take-up Sensor PC1-LCT [2] Vertical Transport Sensor PC2-LCT...

  • Page 744: Solution

    Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 7. Jam Display Solution 7.3.1 Initial check items • When a paper misfeed occurs, first perform the following initial check items. Check item Action Does paper meet product specifications? Replace paper. Replace paper. Is the paper curled, wavy, or damp? Instruct the user on the correct paper storage procedures.
  • Page 745 7. Jam Display Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 7.3.2 LCT Paper Take-Up section/Vertical Transport section misfeed A. Detection timing Type Description LCT Paper Take-Up The leading edge of the paper does not block the Paper Take-up Sensor (PC1- section misfeed LCT) or the Vertical Transport Sensor (PC2-LCT) even after the set period of time detection has elapsed after the Take-up Motor (M1-LCT) is energized.

  • Page 746: Trouble Code

    Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 8. Trouble code Trouble code Trouble code display • The main unit’s CPU performs a self-diagnostics function that, on detecting a malfunc- tion, gives the corresponding malfunction code on the Touch Panel. 4061F4E704DA...

  • Page 747: Trouble Code Display

    8. Trouble code Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 Trouble code list Code Item Description C0001 LCT communication error • Due to a software malfunction, etc., the time on the watchdog timer has run out and a reset is performed. C0102 LCT Vertical Transport Motor •...
  • Page 748 Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 8. Trouble code Code Item Description C0214 LCT shifting failure • The Shift Tray Stop Sensor (PC11-LCT) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the shift operation began (shift to the right). •...

  • Page 749: Solution

    8. Trouble code Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 Solution 8.3.1 C0001: LCT communication error Relevant electrical parts Control Board (PWB-C1 LCT) WIRING DIAGRAM Location Step Action Control signal (Electrical components) Turn OFF the Main Power Switch, wait for 10 sec. or more, and turn ON the —...
  • Page 750 Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 8. Trouble code 8.3.3 C0210: LCT Lift Failure Relevant electrical parts Lift-Up Upper Sensor (PC4-LCT) Control Board (PWB-C1 LCT) Lift-Up Lower Sensor (PC13-LCT) Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor (PC10-LCT) Lower Over Run Sensor (PC7-LCT) WIRING DIAGRAM Location Step Action...
  • Page 751 8. Trouble code Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 8.3.5 C0213: LCT Shift Gate Operation Failure Relevant electrical parts Division Board Position Sensor (PC14-LCT) Control Board (PWB-C1 LCT) Division Board Motor (M3-LCT) WIRING DIAGRAM Location Step Action Control signal (Electrical components) Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper connection, and correct as...
  • Page 752 Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 8. Trouble code 8.3.7 C0215: LCT Shift Motor Failure Relevant electrical parts Shift Tray Motor (M4-LCT) Control Board (PWB-C1 LCT) Shift Motor Pulse Sensor (PC8-LCT) WIRING DIAGRAM Location Step Action Control signal (Electrical components) Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper connection, and correct as —...
  • Page 753 8. Trouble code Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 Blank Page...
  • Page 754 SERVICE MANUAL FIELD SERVICE AD-503 2006.02 Ver. 2.0...
  • Page 755 Revision history After publication of this service manual, the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improvement of their performance. Therefore, the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine. When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual, a revised version will be issued with a revision mark added as required.
  • Page 756 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Feb. 2006 CONTENTS AD-503 General Product specifications ..................... 1 Maintenance Periodical check ...................... 3 Maintenance procedure (Periodical check parts) ..........3 2.1.1 Cleaning Transport Roller / Roll 1, 2 ............. 3 2.1.2 Cleaning Transport Roller / Roll 3 ..............3 2.1.3 Cleaning Ventilation Section .................
  • Page 757 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Feb. 2006 Blank Page...

  • Page 758: Product Specification

    Field Service Ver. 2.0 Feb. 2006 1. Product specifications General Product specifications A. Type Name Duplex Unit Type Switchback and Circulating Duplex Unit Installation Mounted on the right side door of main unit Document Alignment Center B. Paper type Plain paper 64 to 90 g/m (17 to 24 lb) Type...
  • Page 759 1. Product specifications Field Service Ver. 2.0 Feb. 2006 Blank Page...

  • Page 760: Periodical Check

    Field Service Ver. 2.0 Feb. 2006 2. Periodical check Maintenance Periodical check Maintenance procedure (Periodical check parts) NOTE • The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure of Maintenance represents the isopropyl alcohol. 2.1.1 Cleaning Transport Roller / Roll 1, 2 1.
  • Page 761 2. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 2.0 Feb. 2006 2.1.3 Cleaning Ventilation Section 1. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the outside of the Ventilation Section [1] clean of dirt. 4066F2C505DA 2. Open the Duplex Unit Door [2]. 3.
  • Page 762 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Feb. 2006 3. Other Other Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items A. Screws to which blue paint or green paint is applied • Blue paint or green paint is applied to some screws to prevent them from coming loose. •...
  • Page 763 3. Other Field Service Ver. 2.0 Feb. 2006 Disassembly/Assembly list (Other parts) Section Part name Ref. page Unit Duplex Unit Disassembly/Assembly procedure 3.3.1 Duplex Unit 1. Release the tab [1], and remove the Connector Cover [2]. 4066F2C500DA 2. Disconnect the Connector [3]. 4066F2C501DA 3.

  • Page 764: Adjustment/Setting

    Field Service Ver. 2.0 Feb. 2006 4. How to use the adjustment section Adjustment/Setting How to use the adjustment section • “Adjustment/Setting” contains detailed information on the adjustment items and proce- dures for this machine. • Throughout this “Adjustment/Setting,” the default settings are indicated by “ ”. Advance Checks Before attempting to solve the customer problem, the following advance checks must be made.

  • Page 765: Sensor Check

    5. Sensor check Field Service Ver. 2.0 Feb. 2006 Sensor check Check procedure • To allow sensors to be checked for operation easily and safely, data applied to the IC on the board can be checked on the panel with the main unit in the standby state (including a misfeed, malfunction, and closure failure condition).

  • Page 766: Mechanical Adjustment

    Field Service Ver. 2.0 Feb. 2006 6. Mechanical adjustment Mechanical adjustment Adjusting the paper reference position 1. Call the Service Mode to the screen. For details of how to display the Service Mode screen, see the Adjustment/Set- ting of the main unit service manual. 2.
  • Page 767 6. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. 2.0 Feb. 2006 Blank Page...

  • Page 768: Troubleshooting

    Field Service Ver. 2.0 Feb. 2006 7. Jam Display Troubleshooting Jam Display Misfeed display • When misfeed occurs, message, misfeed location “Blinking” and paper location “Light- ing” are displayed on the Touch Panel of the main unit. Code Misfeed location Misfeed access location Action 9201...

  • Page 769: Solution

    7. Jam Display Field Service Ver. 2.0 Feb. 2006 Solution 7.3.1 Initial check items • When a paper misfeed occurs, first perform the following initial check items. Check item Action Does paper meet product specifications? Replace paper. Replace paper. Is the paper curled, wavy, or damp? Instruct the user on the correct paper storage procedures.
  • Page 770 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Feb. 2006 7. Jam Display 7.3.2 Duplex Unit pre-registration section misfeed (AD-503) A. Detection timing Type Description Detection of The Registration Roller Sensor (PC1) is not blocked even after the lapse of a misfeed at Duplex given period of time after the Duplex Paper Take-up sequence started.
  • Page 771 7. Jam Display Field Service Ver. 2.0 Feb. 2006 7.3.3 Duplex Unit transport section misfeed (AD-503) A. Detection timing Type Description The Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 (PC2 DU) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 (PC1 DU) is blocked by the paper.
  • Page 772 SERVICE MANUAL FIELD SERVICE FS-501 2005.07 Ver. 1.0...
  • Page 773 Revision history After publication of this service manual, the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improvement of their performance. Therefore, the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine. When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual, a revised version will be issued with a revision mark added as required.
  • Page 774 Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 CONTENTS FS-501 General Product specification ....................1 Maintenance Other ........................5 Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items ............5 Disassembly/Assembly list (Other parts) .............. 6 Disassembly/Assembly procedure................ 6 2.3.1 Upper Cover/Upper Front Cover/Lower Front Cover/Rear Cover....6 2.3.2 Stapling Unit....................

  • Page 775: Trouble Code

    Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 7.3.3 Finisher Tray Exit ..................16 7.3.4 Shifting Operation ..................16 7.3.5 Aligning Plate Operation ................17 7.3.6 Stapling Unit CD Movement................ 17 7.3.7 Exit Roller/Rolls Spacing ................17 7.3.8 Storage Roller/Rolls Spacing..............18 7.3.9 Elevator Tray Operation ................
  • Page 776 Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 1. Product specification General Product specification A. Type Type Single Staple Finisher Installation Freestanding Document Alignment Center Supplies Staple Cartridge Option Job separator (JS-601) B. Functions Modes Group, Sort, Offset/Group, Offset/Sort, Sort Staple and Group Staple C.
  • Page 777 1. Product specification Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 D. Stapling Staple Filling Mode Dedicated Staple Cartridge Mode (3000 staples) Staple Detection Available (Nearly Empty: 40 remaining staples) Diagonal back side (45 °C) 1 point Stapling Position Rear Parallel 1 point B5S/B5 to A3 Stapled Paper Size 8-1/2 ×...
  • Page 778 Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 1. Product specification F. Machine specifications DC 24 V (supplied from the main unit) Power Requirements DC 5 V (generated by Finisher) Max. Power 63 W or less Consumption 538 mm (W) × 637 mm (D) × 978 mm (H) Dimensions 21-1/4 inch (W) ×...
  • Page 779 1. Product specification Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 Blank Page...
  • Page 780 Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 2. Other Maintenance Other Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items A. Screws to which blue paint or green paint is applied • Blue paint or green paint is applied to some screws to prevent them from coming loose.
  • Page 781 2. Other Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 Disassembly/Assembly list (Other parts) Section Part name Ref. page Upper Cover Upper Front Cover Exterior Parts Lower Front Cover Rear Cover Unit Stapling Unit Option Job Separator JS-601 Disassembly/Assembly procedure 2.3.1 Upper Cover/Upper Front Cover/Lower Front Cover/Rear Cover 4684fs2508c0 1.
  • Page 782 Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 2. Other 2.3.2 Stapling Unit 1. Holding both sides of the cover [1], lift the cover up and take it off. 4684fs2501c0 2. Remove two screws [2], disconnect the connector [3], and remove the Stapling Unit [4] from the moving cradle.
  • Page 783 2. Other Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 3. Remove two screws [5] and the con- nector [6], and remove the Job Sepa- rator [7]. 4683F2C506DA...
  • Page 784 Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 3. How to use the adjustment section Adjustment/Setting How to use the adjustment section • “Adjustment/Setting” contains detailed information on the adjustment items and proce- dures for this machine. • Throughout this “Adjustment/Setting,” the default settings are indicated by “ ”. Advance Checks Before attempting to solve the customer problem, the following advance checks must be made.
  • Page 785 4. Sensor Check Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 Sensor Check Check procedure • To allow sensors to be checked for operation easily and safely, data applied to the IC on the board can be checked on the panel with the main unit in the standby state (including a misfeed, malfunction, and closure failure condition).
  • Page 786 Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 4. Sensor Check A. Sensor monitor 3 Operation characteristics/ Panel display Symbol Panel display Part/Signal name PC1-FN Exit (Non-sort1) 1st Tray Exit Sensor Paper Paper not present present PC19-FN Exit (Non-sort3) Job Tray Exit Sensor Paper Paper not present...

  • Page 787: Adjustment Of The Lower Entrance Motor (M2-Fn) Timing Belt

    5. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 Mechanical adjustment Adjustment of the solenoids 5.1.1 Adjustment of the Upper / Lower Entrance Switching Solenoid (SL1-FN) 1. Loosen the screw [1] that secures the solenoid in position. 2. Move the solenoid [2] up and down and lower the lever [3] downward.

  • Page 788: Adjustment Of The Exit Motor (M3-Fn) Timing Belt

    Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 5. Mechanical adjustment 5.2.3 Adjustment of the Exit Motor (M3-FN) Timing Belt 1. Loosen three screws [1]. 2. Tighten three screws [1] so that the distance D between the upper end face of the head of three screws [1] and the upper end face of the slot in the mounting bracket [2] measures about 0.5 mm.

  • Page 789: Board Switch

    6. Board switch Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 Board switch 4684fs4503c0 Symbol Description Used to run the Test Mode operation. Used to run the Test Mode operation. DIP switch used to set the Test Mode operation. Turn ON or OFF, or blink to indicate a specific condition during Test Mode LED1 to 4 operations.

  • Page 790: Test Mode

    Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 7. Test mode Test mode Test mode setting procedure <Setting Procedure> 1. Turn OFF the Main Power Switch of the main unit. 2. Flip keys of the DIP switch into the ON or OFF position as necessary. (See Table below.) 3.

  • Page 791: Operation In Each Test Mode Operation

    7. Test mode Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 Operation in each test mode operation 7.3.1 1st Tray Exit S1-FN: ON Motors and solenoids: Energized Entrance Motor (M1-FN), Upper Entrance Motor (M4-FN), Upper/Lower Entrance Switching Solenoid (SL1-FN), 1st Tray Entrance Switching Solenoid (SL2-FN) S2-FN: ON Motors and solenoids: Deenergized Entrance Motor (M1-FN), Upper Entrance Motor (M4-FN), Upper/Lower Entrance...

  • Page 792: Aligning Plate Operation

    Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 7. Test mode 7.3.5 Aligning Plate Operation S1-FN: ON At the home position S1-FN: ON At a position to align A4 paper S1-FN: ON At a position to align Letter paper S1-FN: ON At a position to align A4S paper S1-FN: ON At a position to align Letter S paper 7.3.6...

  • Page 793: Storage Roller/Rolls Spacing

    7. Test mode Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 7.3.8 Storage Roller/Rolls Spacing S1-FN: ON Pressed S2-FN: ON Separated 7.3.9 Elevator Tray Operation S1-FN: ON Goes up until the Elevator Tray Upper Limit Sensor PQ (PWB-D FN) is blocked. S2-FN: ON Goes down until the Elevator Tray Upper Limit Sensor PQ (PWB-D FN) is unblocked.

  • Page 794: Troubleshooting

    Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 8. Jam Display Troubleshooting Jam Display Misfeed display • When misfeed occurs, message, misfeed location “Blinking” and paper location “Light- ing” are displayed on the Touch Panel of the main unit. [2] [6] 4684F4C501DA Code Misfeed location Misfeed access location...

  • Page 795: Sensor Layout

    8. Jam Display Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 Sensor layout 4684fs4502c0 [1] Job Tray Exit Sensor PC19-FN [5] Turnover Empty Sensor PC6-HO [2] 1st Tray Exit Sensor PC1-FN [6] Paper Sensor PC1-HO [3] Upper Entrance Sensor PC4-FN [7] Storage Sensor PC3-FN [4] Lower Entrance Sensor PC2-FN...
  • Page 796 Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 8. Jam Display Solution 8.3.1 Initial check items • When a paper misfeed occurs, first perform the following initial check items. Check item Action Does paper meet product specifications? Replace paper. Replace paper. Is the paper curled, wavy, or damp? Instruct the user on the correct paper storage procedures.

  • Page 797: Transport Section Misfeed

    8. Jam Display Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 8.3.2 Transport section misfeed A. Detection timing Type Description The 1st Tray Exit Sensor (PC1-FN) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the leading edge of the paper has blocked the Paper Sensor (PC1-HO) of the Horizontal Transport Unit.

  • Page 798: Tray1 Exit Section Misfeed

    Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 8. Jam Display 8.3.3 Tray1 Exit section misfeed A. Detection timing Type Description Tray1 Exit section The 1st Tray Exit Sensor (PC1-FN) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a misfeed detection given period of time after it has been blocked. B.

  • Page 799: Elevator Tray Exit Section Misfeed

    8. Jam Display Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 8.3.5 Elevator Tray Exit section misfeed A. Detection timing Type Description Elevator Tray Exit The Storage Sensor (PC3-FN) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given section misfeed period of time after it has been blocked. detection B.

  • Page 800: Stapler Section Misfeed

    Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 8. Jam Display 8.3.7 Stapler section misfeed A. Detection timing Type Description Stapler section The Stapler does not return to its home position within a given period of time after misfeed detection the forward drive of the Stapler has been started. B.

  • Page 801: Trouble Code Display

    9. Trouble code Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 Trouble code Trouble code display • The main unit’s CPU performs a self-diagnostics function that, on detecting a malfunc- tion, gives the corresponding malfunction code on the Touch Panel. 4684F4E502DA Trouble code list Code Item Description...

  • Page 802: C1182: Shift Motor Drive Malfunctions

    Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 9. Trouble code Solution 9.3.1 C1182: Shift Motor drive malfunctions Relevant electrical parts Shift Home Position Sensor (PC10-FN) Control Board (PWB-A FN) Shift Motor Pulse Sensor (PC11-FN) Shift Motor (M8-FN) WIRING DIAGRAM Location Step Action Control signal (Electrical...

  • Page 803: C1190: Cd Aligning Motor Drive Malfunction

    9. Trouble code Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 9.3.3 C1190: CD Aligning Motor drive malfunction Relevant electrical parts CD Aligning Home Position Sensor (PC9-FN) Control Board (PWB-A FN) CD Aligning Motor (M5-FN) WIRING DIAGRAM Location Step Action Control signal (Electrical components) Check the motor and sensor connectors...

  • Page 804: C11A2: Storage Roller/Rolls Spacing Motor Drive Malfunction

    Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 9. Trouble code 9.3.5 C11A2: Storage Roller/Rolls Spacing Motor drive malfunction Relevant electrical parts Storage Roller Home Position Sensor (PC12-FN) Control Board (PWB-A FN) Storage Roller/Rolls Spacing Motor (M12-FN) WIRING DIAGRAM Location Step Action Control signal (Electrical components)

  • Page 805: C11B2: Stapling Motor Drive Malfunction

    9. Trouble code Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 9.3.7 C11B2: Stapling Motor drive malfunction Relevant electrical parts Stapling Motor WIRING DIAGRAM Location Step Action Control signal (Electrical components) Check the Stapling motor connectors for proper connection, and correct as nec- —...
  • Page 806 SERVICE MANUAL FIELD SERVICE FS-514/PK-510 /OT-601 2006.08 Ver. 1.0...
  • Page 807 Revision history After publication of this service manual, the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improvement of their performance. Therefore, the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine. When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual, a revised version will be issued with a revision mark added as required.
  • Page 808 Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 CONTENTS FS-514/PK-510/OT-601 General Product specifications ..................... 1 FS-514 ........................1 PK-510........................4 OT-601 ........................5 Maintenance Periodical check ...................... 7 Maintenance procedure (Periodical check parts) ..........7 2.1.1 Cleaning of the roller and roll ................ 7 2.1.2 Cleaning of the paddle ..................
  • Page 809 Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 3.4.16 Exit roller motor/Storage paddle drive clutch/Exit upper roller/ Storage paddle ................... 25 3.4.17 Exit paddle drive clutch/Exit lower roller ............. 30 3.4.18 Aligning section................... 33 3.4.19 Elevator motor/Timing belt ................36 3.4.20 Shutter drive gear ..................41 3.4.21 Duplex guide solenoid ................
  • Page 810 Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 Solution....................... 67 9.2.1 C1183: Elevator motor ascent/descent drive failure........67 9.2.2 C1190: Aligning plate 1 drive failure ............68 9.2.3 C1191: Aligning plate 2 drive failure ............68 9.2.4 C11A0: Paper holding drive failure.............. 69 9.2.5 C11A1: Exit roller pressure/retraction failure ..........
  • Page 811 Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 Blank Page...

  • Page 812: Product Specifications

    Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 1. Product specifications General Product specifications FS-514 A. Type Name Multi staple finisher built into the copier Installation Installed in the copier Document alignment Center Consumables Staples B. Functions Sort, group, sort offset, group offset, sort stable, and punch (when PK-510 is Modes mounted) C.
  • Page 813 1. Product specifications Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 (2) Sort offset/group offset Type Size Weight Max. capacity Exit 200 sheets A5, B5S/B5, A4S/A4, B4, tray1 Plain paper 1000 A4S, 8 x 11S 50 to 90 g/m x 11S/8 x 11, Recycled sheets or less...
  • Page 814 Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 1. Product specifications D. Stapling Staple filling mode Dedicated staple cartridge (5000 staples) Staple detection Available (Nearly Empty: 20 remaining staples) Back of the corner (30 degree) A4, A3, B5, B4 x 11, 11 x 17 Front of the corner (30 degree) Back of the corner (Parallel) A4S, B5S, A5...
  • Page 815 1. Product specifications Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 PK-510 A. Type Name Punch kit PK-510 Installation Built into the finisher Metric B5S, A4, B4, A3 Inch (2 holes) 8 x 11S/8 x 11, 8 x 14, 11 x 17 Paper size Inch (3 holes) 8 x 11, 11 x 17...
  • Page 816 Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 1. Product specifications OT-601 A. Type Name Output tray OT-601 Installation Fixed to the finisher Sort, group, and sort stable Mode Sort, group, sort offset, group offset, and sort stable Number of bins 1 bin Document alignment Center B.
  • Page 817 1. Product specifications Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 C. Machine specifications 282 mm (W) x 368 mm (D) x 57 mm (H) Dimensions 11 inch (W) x 14.5 inch (D) x 2.25 inch (H) Weight 0.7 kg (1.5 lb) D.

  • Page 818: Periodical Check

    Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 2. Periodical check Maintenance Periodical check Maintenance procedure (Periodical check parts) NOTE • The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure of maintenance represents the isopropyl alcohol. 2.1.1 Cleaning of the roller and roll 1. Remove the tray unit. See P.18 2.
  • Page 819 2. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 6. Remove punch waste storage box FN3.1 [1]. (only when PK-510 is installed) 9J08F2C003DA 7. Lower processing guide FN3 [1]. 8. While turning processing knob FN2 [2], wipe the roll [3] using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol.

  • Page 820: Cleaning Of The Paddle

    Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 2. Periodical check 11. While turning processing knob FN6 [1], wipe the roller [2] using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol. 9J08F2C006DA 2.1.2 Cleaning of the paddle 1. Remove the tray unit. See P.18 2.

  • Page 821: Other

    3. Other Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 Other Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items A. Screws to which blue paint or green paint is applied • Blue paint or green paint is applied to some screws to prevent them from coming loose. •...

  • Page 822: Precautions To Be Observed When Option Configuration Is Changed

    Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 3. Other Precautions to be observed when option configuration is changed • The exit tray detection position must be changed depending on configuration of the options mounted on the copier. 3.2.1 Setting the exit tray detection position A.

  • Page 823: Disassembly/Assembly/Cleaning List (Other Parts)

    3. Other Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 Disassembly/Assembly/Cleaning list (Other parts) 3.3.1 Disassembly/Assembly parts list Section Part name Ref. page Finisher unit right front cover P.13 Finisher unit left front cover P.13 Finisher unit rear cover P.13 Finisher unit upper cover P.14 Front door P.14...
  • Page 824 Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 3. Other Disassembly/Assembly procedure 3.4.1 Finisher unit right front cover 1. Open the front door. 2. Remove two screws [1] and remove the finisher unit right front cover [2]. NOTE • At reinstallation, first fit the tab [3] into position.
  • Page 825 3. Other Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 3.4.4 Finisher unit upper cover 1. Remove the tray unit. See P.18 2. Remove the finisher unit. See P.21 3. Remove the finisher unit rear cover. See P.13 4. Remove three screws [1] and remove the finisher unit upper cover [2].
  • Page 826 Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 3. Other 3.4.6 Middle guide 1. Remove the finisher unit. See P.21 2. Remove the finisher unit rear cover. See P.13 3. Remove the finisher unit upper cover. See P.14 4. Remove the harness bundle [1] from the harness guide [2].
  • Page 827 3. Other Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 3.4.7 Intake cover 1. Remove the finisher unit. See P.21 2. Remove the finisher unit rear cover. See P.13 3. Remove the finisher unit upper cover. See P.14 4. Remove the C-ring [1]. 5.
  • Page 828 Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 3. Other 3.4.9 Tray 1/Tray 2 1. Remove two screws [1], and remove the tray 1 [2]. 2. Remove two screws [3], and remove the tray 2 [4]. 9J08F2C515DA 3.4.10 Output tray (OT-601): Option 1.
  • Page 829 3. Other Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 3.4.11 Tray unit NOTE • When removing the tray unit, set the tray unit to its home position. • If the exit tray (OT-601) is installed, remove it in advance. See P.17 1.
  • Page 830 Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 3. Other 5. Disconnect three connectors [1] and remove the screw [2], and the ground wire. 9J08F2C505DA 6. Remove two shoulder screws [1]. NOTE • When the output tray (OT-601) is mounted, remove the screw [2] and remove the mounting holder [3].
  • Page 831 3. Other Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 8. Pull the lock release lever [1] and remove the tray unit from the machine. 9J08F2C508DA 9. Remove four screws [1] and remove the tray unit [2]. NOTE • Make sure the height and angle adjustment of stand table when installing the finisher.
  • Page 832 Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 3. Other 3.4.12 Finisher unit 1. Remove the tray unit. See P.18 2. Disconnect the hookup cord [1]. 9J08F2C514DA 3. Hold the positions as shown in the illustration to remove the finisher unit [1]. NOTE •...
  • Page 833 3. Other Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 3. Measure the width of Y and Z (clear- ance of the exterior parts) on front and back side. Specifications: Y = Z - 1 mm (Y must be smaller than Z) Z = 7 ±...
  • Page 834 Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 3. Other 3.4.14 Stapler unit 1. Open the front door. 2. Turn the dial [1], and move the sta- pler forward. 3. Remove the staple cartridge. 4. Remove the screw [2], and remove the cover [3]. 9J08F2C518DA 5.
  • Page 835 3. Other Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 3.4.15 Punch kit (PK-510): Option 1. Remove the finisher unit. See P.21 2. Remove the finisher unit rear cover. See P.13 3. Remove the finisher unit upper cover. See P.14 4. Remove the finisher unit right front cover.
  • Page 836 Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 3. Other 7. Remove ten screws [1] and punch kit [2]. 9J08F2C552DA 3.4.16 Exit roller motor/Storage paddle drive clutch/Exit upper roller/Storage pad- 1. Remove the tray unit. See P.18 2. Remove the finisher unit. See P.21 3.
  • Page 837 3. Other Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 7. Remove the E-ring [1]. 4349F2C522DA 8. Loosen two hexagonal socket head screws [1], and remove the storage paddle drive clutch assy [2]. 4349F2C523DA NOTE • When installing the storage paddle drive clutch, insert the hexagonal wrench into the flame notch [1], and confirm that the storage paddle drive axis [2] fits to the 2 mm-hole...
  • Page 838 Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 3. Other NOTE • When installing the storage paddle drive clutch, hook the solenoid flap- per [2] on the tab [1] and confirm the storage paddle [3] locates the position as shown in the illustra- tion.
  • Page 839 3. Other Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 10. Remove two C-rings [1] and two bushings [2]. 9J08F2C545DA 11. Remove four screws [1] and remove the exit transportation section (upper) assy [2]. 9J08F2C546DA...
  • Page 840 Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 3. Other 12. Remove two C-rings [1] and two bearings [2], and remove the exit upper roller assy [3]. 9J08F2C547DA 13. Remove the C-ring [1] and the bush- ing [2], and remove the storage pad- dle assy [3].

  • Page 841: Exit Paddle Drive Clutch/Exit Lower Roller

    3. Other Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 15. Disassemble the pressure/retraction system units 9J08F2C036DA 3.4.17 Exit paddle drive clutch/Exit lower roller 1. Remove the tray unit. See P.18 2. Remove the finisher unit. See P.21 3. Remove the finisher unit left front cover.
  • Page 842 Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 3. Other 8. Remove the C-ring [1] and the bear- ing [2]. 9. Remove the gear [3], C-ring [4] and bearing [5]. 10. Remove the exit lower roller assy [6]. 9J08F2C549DA NOTE • When installing the exit paddle drive clutch, turn up the side that the distance between tabs is wider and hook the solenoid flapper [1]...
  • Page 843 3. Other Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 NOTE • When installing the exit paddle drive clutch assy, adjust the posi- tion of blocked panel [1]. Specifications A: 14.6 ± 1 mm • When installing the exit lower roller assy, adjust the position of the arm holder [2].

  • Page 844: Aligning Section

    Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 3. Other 3.4.18 Aligning section 1. Remove the finisher unit left front cover. See P.13 2. Remove the finisher unit rear cover. See P.13 3. Remove the finisher unit upper cover. See P.14 4. Remove the exit transportation sec- tion (upper) assy.
  • Page 845 3. Other Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 12. Remove the harness bundle [1] from the harness guide [2]. 9J08F2C012DA 13. Remove the screw [1] and tab [2], and remove the harness guide [3]. 9J08F2C013DA 14. Remove the knob [1] of FN5 and remove the two gears [2].
  • Page 846 Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 3. Other 15. Remove three screws [1] and bush- ing [2], and remove the gear assy [3]. 9J08F2C014DA NOTE • When installing the gear assy, fit the mounting plate [1] to the caulk- ing axis [2], and tightening with screw.

  • Page 847: Elevator Motor/Timing Belt

    3. Other Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 17. Remove two screws [1] and two shoulder screws [2], and remove the aligning plate assy [3]. 9J08F2C015DA 3.4.19 Elevator motor/Timing belt A. Removal procedure 1. Remove the tray unit. See P.18 2.
  • Page 848 Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 3. Other 7. Remove the C-ring [1] and remove the gear cover [2]. 9J08F2C018DA 8. Remove two screws [1] and remove the metal bracket [2]. 9J08F2C019DA 9. Remove the C-ring [1] and remove the gear (upper rear) [2] and belt [3]. 9J08F2C020DA...
  • Page 849 3. Other Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 10. Remove two screws [1] and remove elevator mounting plate (rear) [2]. 9J08F2C021DA 11. Remove two screws [1] and remove the belt holder [2]. 12. Remove the timing belt (rear) [3]. NOTE •...
  • Page 850 Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 3. Other 14. Remove the C-ring [1] and pin [2], and remove the gear (lower front) [3]. NOTE • Use care not to lose the pin. 9J08F2C024DA 15. Remove two screws [1] and remove the metal bracket [2].
  • Page 851 3. Other Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 17. Remove two screws [1] and remove elevator mounting plate (front) [2]. 9J08F2C027DA 18. Remove two screws [1] and remove the belt holder [2]. 19. Remove the timing belt (front) [3]. 9J08F2C028DA B.

  • Page 852: Shutter Drive Gear

    Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 3. Other 2. Fit the blocked plate [1] as shown in the illustration, and install the lever [2]. Specifications: 0 to +3 mm 3. Install the elevator motor assy. 0 ~ +3 mm 9J08F2C030DA 3.4.20 Shutter drive gear 1.

  • Page 853: Duplex Guide Solenoid

    3. Other Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 3.4.21 Duplex guide solenoid 1. Remove the finisher unit. See P.21 2. Remove the finisher unit rear cover. See P.13 3. Remove the finisher unit upper cover. See P.14 4. Remove two saddles [1] and discon- nect the connector [2].
  • Page 854 Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 3. Other A. Adjustment 1. Loosen the screw [1]. 2. Move the mounting plate up and down until the space A reaches specification, and tighten the screw [1]. Specification: 3.5 mm (Tolerance: + 0.5 mm) NOTE •...

  • Page 855: Fs Control Board

    3. Other Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 3.4.22 FS control board 1. Remove the tray unit. See P.18 2. Remove four screws [1] and remove the cover [2]. 9J08F2C034DA 3. Unplug all the connectors on the FS control board. 4.

  • Page 856: Adjustment/Setting

    Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 4. How to use the adjustment section Adjustment/Setting How to use the adjustment section • “Adjustment/Setting” contains detailed information on the adjustment items and proce- dures for this machine. • Throughout this “Adjustment/Setting,” the default settings are indicated by “ ”. Advance checks Before attempting to solve the customer problem, the following advance checks must be made.

  • Page 857: Sensor Check

    5. Sensor Check Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 Sensor Check Check procedure • To allow sensors to be checked for operation easily and safely, data applied to the IC on the board can be checked on the panel with the main unit in the standby state (including a misfeed, malfunction, and closure failure condition).
  • Page 858 Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 5. Sensor Check C. Sensor check list Operation characteristics/ Symbol Panel display Part/signal name panel display Paper Paper not Carrying Paper Passage Entrance sensor present present Paper Paper not Middle Paper Passage Transport sensor present present Not at...

  • Page 859: Finisher Operations

    6. Finisher operations Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 Finisher operations Entering Finisher 1. Call the Service Mode to the screen. See P.292 of the main unit service manual. 2. Touch [Finisher]. 9J08F3E509DA 3. Touch [Finisher Check]. 9J08F3E510DA 4. Touch the item one wants. 9J08F3E511DA...

  • Page 860: Finisher Check

    Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 6. Finisher operations Finisher Check A. Staple CD Unit • Returns the staple unit to the predetermined position after it moves to the 2-point stapling position for A4. → Moves from the predetermined position to the inner 2-point stapling position for A4. →...
  • Page 861 6. Finisher operations Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 H. Fold Drive (appears only when the saddle kit SD-503 is installed) See P.28 of the SD-503 service manual. Saddle Outlet Open & Close (appears only when the saddle kit SD-503 is installed See P.28 of the SD-503 service manual.

  • Page 862: Punch Hole Position Adjustment (Pk-510)

    Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 6. Finisher operations Punch hole position adjustment (PK-510) 1. Set the copier into the hole punch <Inch area: 2 holes> <Inch area: 3 holes> mode and make a 1-sided copy from a 1-sided original. 2.
  • Page 863 6. Finisher operations Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 7. Set the correction value using the [+]/[-] keys. • To make width A wider, enter a posi- tive value. • To make width A narrower, enter a negative value. • Adjustment range: +10 max. and -10 min.

  • Page 864: Punch Loop Length Adjustment (Pk-510)

    Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 6. Finisher operations Punch loop length adjustment (PK-510) NOTE This adjustment must be made in any of the following cases: • When a slant occurs in the punch hole position. • When misfeed frequently occurs in punch hole mode. 1.

  • Page 865: Mechanical Adjustment

    7. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 Mechanical adjustment Punch hole deviance adjustment (PK-510) NOTE Make this adjustment after any of the following procedures has been performed. • When the punch kit has been replaced. • When the punch kit has been removed. 1.

  • Page 866: Staple Position Adjustment

    Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 7. Mechanical adjustment Staple position adjustment NOTE Make this adjustment after any of the following procedures has been performed. • When the stapler has been replaced. • When staple position is misaligned. 1. Set the staple mode and make a 1-point tilted staple copy.
  • Page 867 7. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 4. Open the front door. 5. Turn the dial [1], and move the sta- pler forward. 6. Loosen the screw [2], and remove the cover [3]. 9J08F2C518DA 7. Loosen two adjustment screws [1] and move the stapler unit [2] in the direction of the arrow to make the adjustment.

  • Page 868: Staple Home Position Sensor Position Adjustment

    Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 7. Mechanical adjustment Staple home position sensor position adjustment NOTE Make this adjustment after any of the following procedures has been performed. • When the stapler has been replaced. • When staple position is misaligned. 1.

  • Page 869: Adjustment Of Clearance Between Stapler And Fd Stopper

    7. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 Adjustment of clearance between stapler and FD stopper NOTE Make this adjustment after any of the following procedures has been performed. • When stapler fails to move appropriately. 1. Check the clearance between the stapler unit [1] and the FD stopper [2] is within the specified range.

  • Page 870: Troubleshooting

    Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 8. Jam display Troubleshooting Jam display Misfeed display • When a paper misfeed occurs, the misfeed message, misfeed location, and paper loca- tion are displayed on the touch panel of the machine. [3], [4] [1], [2], [5] 9J08F4C502DA Display...

  • Page 871: Sensor Layout

    8. Jam display Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 Sensor layout 9J08F4C501DA Transport sensor Entrance sensor Storage tray detect sensor...

  • Page 872: Solution

    Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 8. Jam display Solution 8.3.1 Initial check items • When a paper misfeed occurs, first perform the following initial check items. Check item Action Does paper meet product specifications? Replace paper. Replace paper. Is the paper curled, wavy, or damp? Instruct the user on the correct paper storage procedures.

  • Page 873: Transport Section Misfeed

    8. Jam display Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 8.3.2 Transport section misfeed A. Detection timing Type Description The entrance sensor (PC1) is not turned ON even after the set period of time has elapsed after the copier’s exit sensor (PC2) is turned ON by the paper.

  • Page 874: Exit Section Misfeed

    Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 8. Jam display 8.3.3 Exit section misfeed A. Detection timing Type Description The transport sensor (PC2) is not turned ON even after the set period of time has elapsed after the entrance sensor (PC1) is turned ON by the paper.

  • Page 875: Finisher Staple Misfeed

    8. Jam display Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 8.3.5 Finisher staple misfeed A. Detection timing Type Description The staple home position sensor in the staple unit is not turned ON even Finisher staple misfeed after the set period of time has elapsed after the staple motor rotates for- detection ward, and then the staple motor rotates backward, and the staple home position sensor in the staple unit is turned ON within the set period of time.

  • Page 876: Malfunction Code

    Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 9. Malfunction code Malfunction code Trouble code • The machine’s CPU performs a self-diagnostics function that, on detecting a malfunction, gives the corresponding malfunction code and maintenance call mark on the touch panel. Code Description Detection timing •...
  • Page 877 9. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 Code Description Detection timing • The shutter home position sensor (PC14) is not turned OFF even after the set period of time has elapsed after the shutter motor (M8) is energized (beginning of shutter-opening opera- tion).

  • Page 878: Solution

    Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 9. Malfunction code Solution 9.2.1 C1183: Elevator motor ascent/descent drive failure Relevant electrical parts Elevator motor (M11) Elevator top face detection sensor (PC12) Elevator tray home position sensor (PC11) Relay board/1 (REYB/1) Elevator tray lower limit sensor (PC13) FS control board (FSCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Location...

  • Page 879: C1190: Aligning Plate 1 Drive Failure

    9. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 9.2.2 C1190: Aligning plate 1 drive failure 9.2.3 C1191: Aligning plate 2 drive failure Relevant electrical parts Align motor/1 (M5) FS control board (FSCB) Align motor/2 (M6) Alignment home position sensor/1 (PC7) Alignment home position sensor/2 (PC8) •...

  • Page 880: C11A0: Paper Holding Drive Failure

    Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 9. Malfunction code 9.2.4 C11A0: Paper holding drive failure Relevant electrical parts Exit paddle solenoid (SL2) FS control board (FSCB) Exit paddle home position sensor (PC6) WIRING DIAGRAM Location Step Action Control signal (Electrical component) Check the SL2 connector for proper con- —...

  • Page 881: C11A3: Shutter Drive Failure

    9. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 9.2.6 C11A3: Shutter drive failure Relevant electrical parts Shutter motor (M8) Relay board/1 (REYB/1) Shutter home position sensor (PC14) FS control board (FSCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Location Step Action Control signal (Electrical component) Check the M8 connector for proper con- —...

  • Page 882: C11B2: Staple Drive Failure

    Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 9. Malfunction code 9.2.8 C11B2: Staple drive failure Relevant electrical parts Staple unit FS control board (FSCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Location Step Action Control signal (Electrical component) Check the staple unit connector for proper connection and correct as neces- —...

  • Page 883: C1301: Finishing Option Cooling Fan Motor Failure

    9. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 9.2.10 C1301: Finishing option cooling fan motor failure Relevant electrical parts Cooling fan motor (M9) FS control board (FSCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Location Step Action Control signal (Electrical component) Check the M9 connector for proper connection and correct —...
  • Page 884 SERVICE MANUAL FIELD SERVICE MT-501 2006.08 Ver. 1.0...
  • Page 885 Revision history After publication of this service manual, the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improvement of their performance. Therefore, the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine. When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual, a revised version will be issued with a revision mark added as required.
  • Page 886 Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 CONTENTS MT-501 General Product specification ....................1 Maintenance Periodical check ...................... 3 Maintenance procedure (Periodical check parts) ..........3 2.1.1 Cleaning of the roller and roll ................ 3 Other ........................4 Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items ............4 Disassembly/Assembly list (Other parts) ..............
  • Page 887 Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 Blank Page...

  • Page 888: Product Specification

    Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 1. Product specification General Product specification A. Type Name Mailbin kit Installation Install at the top section of the finisher elevator tray. Number of bins 4 bins Number of sheets stored per bin 125 sheets (90 g/m , 24 lb) Plain paper Storable paper...
  • Page 889 1. Product specification Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 Blank Page...

  • Page 890: Periodical Check

    Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 2. Periodical check Maintenance Periodical check Maintenance procedure (Periodical check parts) NOTE • The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure of maintenance represents the isopropyl alcohol. 2.1.1 Cleaning of the roller and roll 1. Open the right door. 2.

  • Page 891: Other

    3. Other Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 Other Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items A. Red-painted screws • Do not remove or loosen any of the red-painted screws in the field. It should also be noted that, when two or more screws are used for a single part, only one repre- sentative screw may be marked with the red paint.

  • Page 892: Disassembly/Assembly List (Other Parts)

    Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 3. Other Disassembly/Assembly list (Other parts) Section Part name Ref. page Rear cover Front cover Exterior parts Upper cover Right door Paper output tray Disassembly/Assembly procedure 3.3.1 Rear cover/Right door 4510F2C504DA 1. Remove the screw [1] and remove the rear cover [2]. 2.

  • Page 893: Front Cover/Upper Cover/Paper Output Tray

    3. Other Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 3.3.2 Front cover/Upper cover/Paper output tray 4510F2C505DA 1. Remove the screw [1] and remove the front cover [2]. 2. Remove the rear cover. See P.5 3. Remove the upper cover [3]. 4. Remove the paper output trays [4].

  • Page 894: Adjustment/Setting

    Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 4. How to use the adjustment section Adjustment/Setting How to use the adjustment section • “Adjustment/Setting” contains detailed information on the adjustment items and proce- dures for this machine. • Throughout this “Adjustment/Setting,” the default settings are indicated by “ ”. Advance checks Before attempting to solve the customer problem, the following advance checks must be made.

  • Page 895: Sensor Check

    5. Sensor check Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 Sensor check Check procedure • To allow sensors to be checked for operation easily and safely, data applied to the IC on the board can be checked on the panel with the main unit in the standby state (including a misfeed, malfunction, and closure failure condition).

  • Page 896: Sensor Check List

    Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 5. Sensor check 5.2.2 Sensor check list A. Sensors 4 Operation characteristics/ panel display Symbol Panel display Part/Signal name Paper Paper not PC10-MK Paper Passage 1 Lower transport sensor present present Paper Paper not PC9-MK Paper Passage 2 Upper transport sensor...

  • Page 897: Finisher Operations

    6. Finisher operations Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 Finisher operations Entering Finisher Check 1. Call the Service Mode to the screen. See P.292 of the main unit service manual. 2. Touch [Finisher]. 4511F3E522DA 3. Touch [Finisher Check]. 4511F3E525DA 4510F3E512DA 4.

  • Page 898: Finisher Check Modes

    Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 6. Finisher operations Finisher Check modes 12: Mail bin solenoid drive mode • Bin entrance switching solenoids 1, 2 and 3 switch, in order, at the predetermined times. → Bin entrance switching solenoid 1 (SL1-MK) activates for the predetermined time. ...
  • Page 899 6. Finisher operations Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 Blank Page...

  • Page 900: Troubleshooting

    Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 7. Jam display Troubleshooting Jam display Misfeed display • When misfeed occurs, message, misfeed location “Blinking” and paper location “Light- ing” are displayed on the touch panel of the main unit. 4510F4C505DA Display Code Misfeed location Misfeed access location Action...

  • Page 901: Sensor Layout

    7. Jam display Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 Sensor layout 4510F4C501DA [1] Upper transport sensor PC9-MK [2] Lower transport sensor PC10-MK [3] Transport sensor...

  • Page 902: Solution

    Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 7. Jam display Solution 7.3.1 Initial check items • When a paper misfeed occurs, first perform the following initial check items. Check item Action Does paper meet product specifications? Replace paper. Replace paper. Is the paper curled, wavy, or damp? Instruct the user on the correct paper storage procedures.
  • Page 903 7. Jam display Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 7.3.2 Transport section misfeed A. Detection timing Type Description The lower transport sensor (PC10-MK) is not turned ON even after the set period of time has elapsed after the transport sensor (PC2) is turned ON by the paper.
  • Page 904 SERVICE MANUAL FIELD SERVICE SD-503 2006.08 Ver. 1.0...
  • Page 905 Revision history After publication of this service manual, the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improvement of their performance. Therefore, the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine. When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual, a revised version will be issued with a revision mark added as required.
  • Page 906 Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 CONTENTS SD-503 General Product specification ....................1 Maintenance Periodical check ...................... 3 Maintenance procedure (Periodical check parts) ..........3 2.1.1 Cleaning of the rollers and rolls ..............3 Service tool ......................3 CE tool list......................3 Other ........................

  • Page 907: Solution When Paper Curl Occurs

    Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 Center Staple Position Adjustment..............32 Mechanical adjustment ..................35 Fold Angle Adjustment ..................35 Center Staple Angle Adjustment ................ 36 Troubleshooting Jam display ......................37 Misfeed display ....................37 Sensor layout...................... 37 Solution ......................38 9.3.1 Initial check items ..................
  • Page 908 Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 1. Product specification General Product specification A. Type Name Saddle sticher SD-503 Type Built into the finisher Installation Screwed to the finisher Document alignment Center Center parallel two points Stapling function No. of sheets to be stapled together: 2 to 15 B.

  • Page 909: Product Specification

    1. Product specification Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 Blank Page...

  • Page 910: Periodical Check

    Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 2. Periodical check Maintenance Periodical check Maintenance procedure (Periodical check parts) NOTE • The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure of maintenance represents the isopropyl alcohol. 2.1.1 Cleaning of the rollers and rolls 1. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the roller [1] and roll [2].

  • Page 911: Other

    4. Other Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 Other Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items A. Red-painted screws • Do not remove or loosen any of the red-painted screws in the field. It should also be noted that, when two or more screws are used for a single part, only one repre- sentative screw may be marked with the red paint.

  • Page 912: Disassembly/Assembly List (Other Parts)

    Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 4. Other Disassembly/Assembly list (other parts) 4.2.1 Disassembly/Assembly parts list Section Part name Ref. page Paper output tray Front cover Exterior parts Upper cover Rear cover Saddle unit Unit Crease unit Stapler unit P.11 In &...

  • Page 913: Rear Cover

    4. Other Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 4.3.2 Rear cover 4511F2C501DA 1. Remove two screws [1], and remove the rear cover [2]. 4.3.3 Upper cover 1. Remove the front cover. See P.5 2. Remove the rear cover. See P.6 3.

  • Page 914: Saddle Unit

    Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 4. Other 4.3.4 Saddle unit 1. Remove the screw [1], and remove the connector cover [2]. 4511F2C555DA 2. Remove the screw [1], and remove the ground wire [2]. 3. Unplug two connectors [3]. 4. Remove the snap band [4]. 4511F2C556DA 5.
  • Page 915 4. Other Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 6. Pull the lock release lever [1], and open the saddle unit. 7. Remove the screw [2]. 4511F2C558DA 8. Remove two screws [1], and remove the saddle unit [2]. 4511F2C559DA...

  • Page 916: Crease Unit

    Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 4. Other 4.3.5 Crease unit 1. Remove the saddle unit. See P.7 2. Remove the finisher unit. See P.21 of the FS-514/PK-510/OT-601 service manual. 3. Remove four screws [1] and remove the finisher unit rear cover [2]. 4.
  • Page 917 4. Other Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 7. Unplug the connector [1]. 4511F2C563DA 8. Remove three screws [1], and remove the crease unit [2]. NOTE • When the punch kit is mounted, remove the punch kit first. 4511F2C564DA...

  • Page 918: Stapler Unit

    Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 4. Other 4.3.6 Stapler unit 1. Remove the saddle unit. See P.7 2. Remove the paper output tray. See P.5 3. Remove the front cover. See P.5 4. Remove the rear cover. See P.6 5.
  • Page 919 4. Other Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 15. Remove the wire saddle [1], and unplug the connector [2]. 4511F2C518DA 16. Remove two screws [1] and two shoulder screws [2]. 4511F2C519DA 17. Remove the processing tray [1]. 4511F2C520DA 18. Unplug all the connectors on the main control board.
  • Page 920 Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 4. Other 21. Remove eight screws [1], and remove the lower cover [2]. 4511F2C523DA 22. Remove the wire saddle and unplug the connector. 23. Remove three screws [1], and remove the clincher 1 [2]. 4511F2C524DA 24.
  • Page 921 4. Other Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 Precaution for clincher reinstallation • When the clincher is installed, the position of the stapler and the clincher will be misaligned. Be sure to perform the following adjustment. 1. Use three screws [1] to temporary fix the clincher [2].

  • Page 922: In & Out Guide Drive Motor

    Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 4. Other 6. Tighten six screws [1]. NOTE • Turn the gear again and check to see that the protrusion of the clincher smoothly fits into the recess in the jig. 7. Turn the gear and remove the jig. 4511F2C554DA 4.3.7 In &...
  • Page 923 4. Other Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 11. Remove eight screws [1], and remove the lower cover [2]. 4511F2C523DA 12. Remove the wire saddle [1], and unplug two connectors [2]. 4511F2C529DA 13. Remove the screw [1], and remove the in & out guide drive motor assy [2].

  • Page 924: Crease Roller

    Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 4. Other Precaution for in & out guide drive motor reinstallation 4511F2C533DA 1. Press the two in & out guides [1] in and check that they touch the stopper [2] simulta- neously. 2. Check that pins [4] can be inserted through the positioning holes [3] (3 holes) of the in &...
  • Page 925 4. Other Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 3. Remove two screws [1], and remove the guide plate [2]. 4511F2C566DA 4. Remove two screws [1], and remove the chopper assy [2]. 4511F2C567DA NOTE • Install the chopper assy in the direction shown in the left figure.
  • Page 926 Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 4. Other 5. Remove three C-rings [1] and three pins [2], and remove three gears [3]. NOTE • Use care not to lose the pin. 4511F2C568DA NOTE • Install the gear so that the mark [1] is aligned to the position shown in the left figure.
  • Page 927 4. Other Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 8. Remove two screws [1], and remove the rear holder [2]. 4511F2C571DA 9. Remove the C-ring [1] and the pin [2], and remove the gear [3]. NOTE • Use care not to lose the pin. 4511F2C572DA NOTE •...
  • Page 928 Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 4. Other 10. Remove two C-rings [1], two bear- ings [2] and two washers [3]. NOTE • Use care not to lose the washer. 4511F2C574DA 11. Remove two gears [1] of crease roller 1 assy, and remove the guide plate [2].
  • Page 929 4. Other Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 NOTE • When mounting the crease roller 1 assy [1], mount it so that the tally mark on the gear [2] for the crease roller 1 and the tally mark on the gear below will be next to each other with the one on the gear [2] being outer side.
  • Page 930 Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 4. Other NOTE • When installing the gear [1] to the guide plate [2], insert the gear [1] at an angle and use care not to break the tabs [3]. • Install the gear and guide plate as shown on the left.
  • Page 931 4. Other Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 NOTE • Use care to mount the crease roller assy 1 [1] and 2 [2] in the proper directions. 4511F2C580DA...

  • Page 932: Adjustment/Setting

    Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 5. How to use the adjustment section Adjustment/Setting How to use the adjustment section • “Adjustment/Setting” contains detailed information on the adjustment items and proce- dures for this machine. • Throughout this “Adjustment/Setting,” the default settings are indicated by “ ”. Advance checks Before attempting to solve the customer problem, the following advance checks must be made.

  • Page 933: Sensor Check

    6. Sensor check Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 Sensor check Check procedure • To allow sensors to be checked for operation easily and safely, data applied to the IC on the board can be checked on the panel with the main unit in the standby state (including a misfeed, malfunction, and closure failure condition).

  • Page 934: Sensor Check List

    Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 6. Sensor check 6.2.2 Sensor check list A. Sensors 4 Operation characteris- tics/Panel display Symbol Panel display Part/Signal name Paper Paper not PC20-SK Saddle exit Saddle exit sensor present present Paper Paper not PC22-SK Folding R home Crease roller home position sensor present...

  • Page 935: Finisher Operations

    7. Finisher operations Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 Finisher operations Entering Finisher Check 1. Display the Service Mode screen. See P.292 of the main unit service manual. 2. Touch [Finisher Check]. 4511F3E522DA 3. Touch the item one wants. 4511F3E524DA...

  • Page 936: Finisher Check Modes

    Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 7. Finisher operations Finisher Check modes A. Creasing unit movement mode • Performs the creasing drive once. → Raises the layable guide. → Stops after the predetermined time. → Lowers the layable guide. → The operation is finished. B.

  • Page 937: Fold & Staple Pos. Adjustment

    7. Finisher operations Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 Fold & Staple Pos. Adjustment NOTE Make this adjustment after any of the following procedures has been performed. • When the crease unit has been replaced. • When a deviation occurs in the crease. •...
  • Page 938 Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 7. Finisher operations 8. Touch [Fold Position Adjustment]. 4511F3E526DA 9. Touch [A3] and then touch [Normal Paper]. 4511F3E528DA • If the fold is offset as shown on the left. 10. Touch [-] and set the appropriate numeric value.

  • Page 939: Center Staple Position Adjustment

    7. Finisher operations Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 • If the fold is offset as shown on the left. 11. Touch [+] and set the appropriate numeric value. Adjustment range: 0 to +10 (1 increment 0.5 mm) Exit direction 4511F3C506DA 12.
  • Page 940 Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 7. Finisher operations 7. Touch [Fold & Staple Pos.Adjust- ment]. 4511F3E525DA 8. Touch [Center Staple Position]. 4511F3E526DA 9. Touch [A3] and then touch [Normal Paper]. 4511F3E527DA...
  • Page 941 7. Finisher operations Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 • If the fold is offset as shown on the left. 10. Touch [-] and set the appropriate numeric value. Adjustment range: 0 to -10 (1 increment 0.5 mm) Exit direction 4511F3C510DA •...

  • Page 942: Mechanical Adjustment

    Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 8. Mechanical adjustment Mechanical adjustment Fold Angle Adjustment NOTE Make this adjustment after any of the following procedures has been performed. • When the crease unit has been replaced. • When a slant occurs in the crease. 1.

  • Page 943: Center Staple Angle Adjustment

    8. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 Center Staple Angle Adjustment NOTE Make this adjustment after any of the following procedures has been performed. • When staple unit has been replaced. • When a slant occurs in the position of the center staple. 1.

  • Page 944: Troubleshooting

    Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 9. Jam display Troubleshooting Jam display Misfeed display • When misfeed occurs, message, misfeed location “Blinking” and paper location “Light- ing” are displayed on the touch panel of the main unit. 4511F4C503DA Display Code Misfeed location Misfeed processing location Action...

  • Page 945: Solution

    9. Jam display Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 Solution 9.3.1 Initial check items • When a paper misfeed occurs, first perform the following initial check items. Check item Action Does paper meet product specifications? Replace paper. Replace paper. Is the paper curled, wavy, or damp? Instruct the user on the correct paper storage procedures.

  • Page 946: Paper Bundle Exit Misfeed

    Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 9. Jam display 9.3.2 Paper bundle exit misfeed A. Detection timing Type Description The storage tray detecting sensor (PC3) is not turned OFF even after the set period of time has elapsed after the exit motor (M4) is energized. The saddle exit sensor (PC20-SK) is not turned ON even after the set Paper bundle misfeed period of time has elapsed after the exit motor (M4) is energized.

  • Page 947: Staple Unit 1 Misfeed/Staple Unit 2 Misfeed

    9. Jam display Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 9.3.3 Staple unit 1 misfeed/Staple unit 2 misfeed A. Detection timing Type Description The staple home position sensor in the staple unit is not turned ON even Staple unit misfeed after the set period of time has elapsed after the staple motor rotates for- detection ward, and then the staple motor rotates backward, and the staple home position sensor in the staple unit is turned ON within the set period of time.

  • Page 948: Creasing Section Misfeed

    Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 9. Jam display 9.3.4 Creasing section misfeed A. Detection timing Type Description The entrance sensor (PC1) is not turned ON even after the set period of time has elapsed after the entrance motor (M1) is energized (beginning of backward rotation operation).

  • Page 949: 10. Malfunction Code

    10. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 10. Malfunction code 10.1 Trouble code • The machine’s CPU performs a self-diagnostics function that, on detecting a malfunction, gives the corresponding malfunction code and maintenance call mark on the touch panel.

  • Page 950: 10.2 Solution

    Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 10. Malfunction code 10.2 Solution 10.2.1 C11A2: Saddle exit roller pressure/retraction failure Relevant electrical parts Saddle exit open/close motor (M9-SK) Main control board (PWB-C SK) Saddle exit roller home position sensor (PC18-SK) WIRING DIAGRAM Location Step Action...

  • Page 951: C11A5: Saddle In & Out Guide Motor Failure

    10. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 10.2.3 C11A5: Saddle in & out guide motor failure Relevant electrical parts In & out guide motor (M13-SK) Main control board (PWB-C SK) In &out guide home sensor (PC23-SK) WIRING DIAGRAM Location Step Action...

  • Page 952: C11B5: Side Staple 1 Drive Failure

    Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 10. Malfunction code 10.2.5 C11B5: Side staple 1 drive failure 10.2.6 C11B6: Side staple 2 drive failure Relevant electrical parts Staple unit 1 Main control board (PWB-C SK) Staple unit 2 WIRING DIAGRAM Location Step Action Control signal...
  • Page 953 10. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2006 Blank Page...
  • Page 954 SERVICE MANUAL FIELD SERVICE FS-603 2005.07 Ver. 1.0...
  • Page 955 Revision history After publication of this service manual, the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improvement of their performance. Therefore, the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine. When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual, a revised version will be issued with a revision mark added as required.
  • Page 956 Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 CONTENTS FS-603 General Product specification ....................1 Maintenance Other ........................5 Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items ............5 Disassembly/Assembly list (Other parts) .............. 6 Disassembly/Assembly procedure................ 7 2.3.1 Exit Tray ......................7 2.3.2 Front Cover ....................7 2.3.3 Rear Cover....................
  • Page 957 Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 Adjustment/Setting How to use the adjustment section ............... 23 Sensor check ......................24 Check procedure ....................24 Sensor check list ....................24 4.2.1 Sensor check screen .................. 24 Mechanical adjustment ..................26 Adjustment of the stapling position..............26 5.1.1 Adjustment procedure.................
  • Page 958 Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 7.3.4 Folding position section misfeed ..............54 7.3.5 Stapler section misfeed................55 7.3.6 Paper Stack Exit section misfeed..............55 Trouble code......................56 Trouble code display ................... 56 Trouble code list....................56 Solution....................... 59 8.3.1 C1180: Transport System Drive malfunctions ..........
  • Page 959 Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 Blank Page...
  • Page 960 Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 1. Product specification General Product specification A. Type Type Multi Staple Finisher with Saddle (Booklet) Installation Freestanding Document Alignment Center Supplies Staple Cartridge B. Functions Modes Normal Group, Sort, Group Offset, Sort Offset, Sort Staple, Center Staple &...
  • Page 961 1. Product specification Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 (3) Sort staple No. of Sheets to Type Size Weight Tray Capacity Exit Tray be Stapled Plain Paper B5S/B5 to Normal Mode A4S/ Normal Mode *1 8.5 × 11S 8.5 × 14 Thick Paper paper 60 to 90 g/m...
  • Page 962 Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 1. Product specification E. No. of sheets to be stapled (sort staple) (1) A4S, 8.5 × 11S or smaller No. of Sets No. of Sheets to be Stapled Rear: Parallel Center: Parallel Front: Parallel 3 to 5 6 to 10 11 to 20...
  • Page 963 1. Product specification Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 Blank Page...
  • Page 964 Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 2. Other Maintenance Other Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items A. Screws to which blue paint or green paint is applied • Blue paint or green paint is applied to some screws to prevent them from coming loose.
  • Page 965 2. Other Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 Disassembly/Assembly list (Other parts) Section Part name Ref. page Exit Tray Front Cover Rear Cover Exterior Parts Upper Door Finisher Tray Upper Cover Upper Cover Side Guide Middle Transport Unit P.10 Stapler P.10 Saddle Section P.11...
  • Page 966 Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 2. Other Disassembly/Assembly procedure 2.3.1 Exit Tray 1. Remove four screws [1], and remove the Exit Tray [2]. 4583fs2526c0 2.3.2 Front Cover 1. Remove the Middle Transport Unit. See P.10 2. Open the Front Door [1]. 3.
  • Page 967 2. Other Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 2.3.4 Upper Door 1. Open the Upper Door [1], and remove the Door Band Holder [2] by turning it clockwise. 2. Remove the Door Band [3]. 3. Remove the screw [4], and remove the grounding wire.
  • Page 968 Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 2. Other 2.3.6 Upper Cover 1. Remove the Front Cover. See P.7 2. Remove the Rear Cover. See P.7 3. Remove two screws [1]. 4. Open the Upper Door[2],and remove the Upper Cover [3]. 4583fs2535c0 4583fs2536c0 2.3.7...
  • Page 969 2. Other Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 2.3.8 Middle Transport Unit 1. Remove four screws [1]. 2. Hold up the Middle Front Cover [2] and the Middle Rear Cover [3], and remove them while shifting them back and forth. 4583fs2540c0 3.
  • Page 970 Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 2. Other 2.3.10 Saddle Section 1. Remove the Front Cover. See P.7 2. Remove the Rear Cover. See P.7 3. Remove the Punch Dust Box. 4. Open the Jam Access Cover [1], remove two screws [2], and remove the Right Stay [3].
  • Page 971 2. Other Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 2.3.11 Finisher Tray 1. Remove the Finisher Tray Upper Cover. See P.8 2. Remove the Side Guide. See P.9 3. Remove two screws [1], and discon- nect six connectors [2]. 4583fs2546c0 4. Pull out the Finisher Stopper Base [3], and disengage the front claw [5] and the rear claw [6] of the Finisher Stopper [4].
  • Page 972 Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 2. Other 2.3.12 Paddle Section 1. Remove the Finisher Tray. See P.12 2. Place the Finisher Tray [1] as shown in the figure. NOTE • Be careful not to damage the Align- ing Plate [2]. 4583fs2548c0 3.
  • Page 973 2. Other Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 4. Push up the Exit Roller (Upper) [4] from the bottom to release it from the shaft [5]. 4583fs2553c0 5. Turn up the Exit Roller (Upper) [6], and then push it down to remove it. 6.
  • Page 974 Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 2. Other 5. Push up the Safety Guide [4] from the bottom to release it from the shaft [5] and remove it. 4583fs2557c0 6. Remove the Paddle [6]. 7. Remove the other Paddles as well in the same way.
  • Page 975 2. Other Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 5. Remove the screw [9], and remove the Paper Guide (Rear) [11] while disengaging the claw [10]. [11] [10] 4583fs2562c0 6. Remove two C-clips [12], and move two bushings [13] inside, respec- tively.
  • Page 976 Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 2. Other 2.3.16 Stapler/Folding Drive Unit 1. Remove the Rear Cover. See P.7 2. Open the Front Door [1], and slightly pull out the stapler section [2]. 4583fs2567c0 3. Remove screw [3], and remove the interface cable presser [4].
  • Page 977 2. Other Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 10. Remove three screws [13]. [13] [13] [13] 4583fs2572c0 11. Remove the screw [14], and remove the Stapler/Folding Drive Unit [15]. [14] [15] 4583fs2573c0 2.3.17 Transport Roller 1. Remove the Upper Door. See P.8 2.
  • Page 978 Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 2. Other 8. Remove the gear 1 [7], and remove [10] the gear 2 [8] while disengaging the [12] claw. NOTE • Be careful not to lose the gear pin. 9. Remove the C-clip [9], and remove [11] the bushing [10].
  • Page 979 2. Other Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 2.3.19 Punch Unit 1. Remove the Punch Trash Box. 2. Disconnect the connector J1005 [1]. 3. Remove the Harness from the Har- ness Guide [2]. 4583fs2586c0 4. Disconnect the connector [3]. 5. Remove the screw [4], and remove the Sensor Support Plate [5].
  • Page 980 Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 2. Other 2.3.20 Finisher Control Board 1. Remove the Rear Cover. See P.7 2. Disconnect all connectors on the Board, and remove the screw [1]. 3. Release the PCB support [2], and remove the Finisher Control Board [3].
  • Page 981 2. Other Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 2.3.24 Punch Motor 1. Remove the Upper Cover. See P.9 2. Remove two screws [1]. 3. Disconnect the connector [2], and remove the punch motor [3]. 4583fs2584c0 2.3.25 Side Registration Motor 1. Disconnect the connector J1001 [1]. 2.

  • Page 982: Adjustment/Setting

    Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 3. How to use the adjustment section Adjustment/Setting How to use the adjustment section • “Adjustment/Setting” contains detailed information on the adjustment items and proce- dures for this machine. • Throughout this “Adjustment/Setting,” the default settings are indicated by “ ”. Advance Checks Before attempting to solve the customer problem, the following advance checks must be made.

  • Page 983: Sensor Check

    4. Sensor check Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 Sensor check Check procedure • To allow sensors to be checked for operation easily and safely, data applied to the IC on the board can be checked on the panel with the main unit in the standby state (including a misfeed, malfunction, and closure failure condition).
  • Page 984 Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 4. Sensor check Operation characteristics/ Panel display Symbol Panel display Part/Signal name PI13-FN Crease Tray Saddle Tray Sensor Paper Paper not present present PI11-FN Crease Home Folding Home Position Sensor PI12-FN Crease Roller Home Folding Roller Home Position Sensor PI14-FN Crease Clock...

  • Page 985: Mechanical Adjustment

    5. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 Mechanical adjustment Adjustment of the stapling position • The stapling position is adjusted by aligning the stapling position to the folding position. • This adjustment is made in the Service Mode of the main unit. Since the adjustment is made in increments of 1 mm, this adjustment is useful for eliminating a displacement of 1mm or more.
  • Page 986 Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 5. Mechanical adjustment Standard:0 ± 2 mm <To - side> <Standard> <To + side> 4583fs3501c0 10. Press the Clear Key. 11. Adjust with the [+]/[-] Keys. When the stapling position is shifted to the direction A: Adjust the value to the - side.

  • Page 987: Adjustment Of The Folding Position

    5. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 Adjustment of the folding position • The folding position is adjusted by aligning the folding position to the stapling position. • This adjustment is made in the Service Mode of the main unit. Since the adjustment is made in increments of 1 mm, this adjustment is useful for eliminating a displacement of 1 mm or more.
  • Page 988 Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 5. Mechanical adjustment 9. Press the Clear Key. 10. Adjust with the [+]/[-] Keys. When the stapling position is shifted to the direction A: Adjust the value to the + side.When the stapling position is shifted to the direction B: Adjust the value to the - side.

  • Page 989: Adjustment Of Height And Inclination

    5. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 Adjustment of height and inclination 1. Gently move the finisher toward the machine and check for following. • Is the positioning pin aligned with the hole in the finisher? 4583fs3503c0 • Does the horizontal transport unit run excessively slantwise? •...
  • Page 990 Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 5. Mechanical adjustment 4. Loosen two caster fixing screws [4]. (4 points) 4583fs3507c0 5. Turn the adjustment screw [5] to make adjustment. • To heighten: Turn the screw counter- clockwise. • To bring down: Turn the screw clock- wise.

  • Page 991: Adjustment Of The Folding Position

    5. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 Adjustment of the Folding Position • Folding position is adjusted by adjusting the Tray Section and the Saddle Section. • Adjust the folding position by aligning the Tray Section. Adjust the position of the Saddle Section if the position is still not proper.
  • Page 992 Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 5. Mechanical adjustment 3. Remove the Middle Transport Unit. See P.10 4. Remove the front cover. See P.7 5. Loosen two screws [2] on the Tray Section. 4583F3C519DA 6. Move the Tray Section [3] back and forth, and move the positioning dow- els [4] right and left to adjust.
  • Page 993 5. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 • If it is deviated downward <A>, move the positioning dowels to the left. <A> • If it is deviated upward <B>, move the positioning dowels to the right. NOTE • The folding line will move along with the staples.
  • Page 994 Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 5. Mechanical adjustment 9. Move the two positioning dowels [6] to adjust. 4583F3C522DA • If it is deviated downward <C>, move the positioning dowel to the left. <C> • If it is deviated upward <D>, move the positioning dowel to the right.

  • Page 995: Adjustment Procedure

    5. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 Stapler Phase Adjustment • Make phase adjustment of the Stapler following the procedures given below whenever the Gear or Timing Belt in front of the Stapler has been replaced or removed for some reason, since such replacement or removal will cause mistiming between the staple driving by the Staple Driver (the lower...
  • Page 996 Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 5. Mechanical adjustment 10. Remove the Timing Belt [18]. 11. Remove the E-Ring [19], and remove [19] [20] the Staple Position Confirm Gear [20]. [18] 4583fs2507c0 12. Turn the Gear [21] to position the hole [22] in the Gear of the Staple Driver to the hole behind.
  • Page 997 5. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 16. Set the Timing Belt [27] to the Gear [28] and Gear [29] with the Gear and the Cam in the fixed condition. [28] [29] [27] 4583fs2512c0 17. Install the Staple Position Confirm Gear [32] in such a way that the blue [31] mark [30] of the Gear comes face to...

  • Page 998: Adjustment Procedure

    Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 5. Mechanical adjustment Saddle Gear Phase Adjustment • Whenever the Gear in front of the Saddle or the Folding Roller has been replaced or removed for some reason, make gear phase adjustment following the procedures given below.

  • Page 999: Board Switch

    6. Board switch Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 Board switch PWB-A FN (Finisher Control Board) 12 1 CN22 CN18 CN10 CN13 LED2 LED1 PSW2 PSW1 CN21 CN11 4583fs3509c0 Symbol Description Used to adjust the folding position, adjust the center 2-point stapling position and adjust the alignment plate position.

  • Page 1000: Adjustment Of The Folding Positions

    Field Service Ver. 1.0 Jul. 2005 6. Board switch 6.1.1 Adjustment of the folding positions • When a folding position is adjusted, adjust the folding position to the stapling position. Make this adjustment after replacing the Finisher Control Board or when the folding posi- tion must be changed for some reason.

This manual is also suitable for:

Bizhub c252

Table of Contents

Save PDF